Muratec All in One Printer MFX 1300 1700 User Manual
MFX-1300/1700  
Plain-paper digital Fax/Copier/Printer  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademarks  
Muratec, the Muratec logo and all Muratec fax product names contained herein are  
trademarks of Muratec America, Inc.  
ENERGYSTAR is a registered mark of the United States EnvironmentalProtection Agency.  
Copyright  
Copyright ' 2002 by Muratec America, Inc, Allrights reserved.  
As an Energy Starfi partner, Muratec America, Inc., has determined  
that this product meets the Energy Star guidelines for energy efif-  
ciency.  
Energy saving  
Your machine can save the energy with its Energy Saving Mode.  
In the Energy Saving Mode the printer will not use its fusing lamp and Energy Save Mode  
will be displayed on the LCD. If your machine receives a fax message or if any key is  
pressed your machine will automatically wake up.  
The time for the machine to enter the Energy saving mode can be selected from 1 to 240  
minutes. For details, see page 1.19.  
Super G3 is an extension of Group 3 fax technology standards,  
allowing the use of high-speed ITU-TV.34 modems for 33.6 Kbps  
transmission and high-speed protocols for rapid handshaking.  
JBIG Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU- standard  
T
image data compression method. As JBIG compresses the data more  
efficiently than MMR, itisespeciallyeffective when transmitting  
halftone (grayscale) image document.  
Note: Super G3 and JBIG are available only for MFX-1700.  
This manual and any updates to it can be found online at w w w.muratec.com  
Go to the Products section of this site, then click on MFX-1300/1700  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before using your Muratec fax machine  
Clean  
Where to set up your fax machine  
Dust buildup can damage your fax. Periodically clean  
your fax machine as described in the operating instruc-  
tions. Do not use a dust cover,which can cause  
damaging overheating.  
Follow these guidelines when setting up your fax machine:  
Away from direct sunlight  
To avoid overheating, set up your fax machine away  
from direct sunlight or a heater.  
Near a phone jack  
Your fax machine uses a standard (modular) telephone  
jack, also known as an RJ-11.  
Level, and vibration-free  
To avoid damage to the machine or injuries, set the fax  
machine up in a level, vibration-free location.  
Space around the fax machine  
To ensure proper ventilation and easy operation, set  
up the machine in an area that meets the minimum  
requirements for clearance as illustrated below.  
Avoid extreme high / low temperature  
Use your fax machine within the temperature range of  
50” F to 89.6” F (10” C to 32” C).  
50 - 89.6 F  
(
)
10 - 32 C  
60 cm  
(23.6 inches)  
15 cm  
(5.9 inches)  
25 cm  
(9.8 inches)  
Away from a television or radio  
Many appliances and office equipment, including tele-  
visions, radios, copy machines, air conditioners and  
computers, can generate electronic noise that can  
interfere with the operation of your fax machine.  
40 cm  
40 cm  
(15.7 inches)  
(15.7 inches)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power requirements  
General Precautions  
Plug in the power cord  
Never disassemble your fax machine!  
Plug the power cord carefully and completely into a  
wall outlet. Do not leave any portion of the electrical  
cord s metal plugs exposed. Doing so could cause a  
fire and poses a risk of electrical shock.  
Disassembling your fax machine can cause serious  
injury to you and damage to your fax. If service is  
required, call your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Do not share an extension cord  
connector with other plugs  
It can cause electrical shock.  
Keep away from liquids  
Keep liquids and metalpins or other objects away from  
your fax machine. If something falls into the fax  
machine, remove the plug from the outlet, and call  
your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Never handle your fax machine or power  
cord with wet hands  
Never touch your fax machine or power cord if your  
hands are wet.  
Do not share an outlet with a large appli-  
ance  
High-consumption appliances such as a refrigerator  
or air conditioner can cause draw-downs which could  
damage your fax machine.  
During electrical storms, disconnect the  
plug from the outlet  
Electrical storms can cause electrical shock or  
damage to the fax machine.  
120 VAC outlet  
Use a standard three-pronged 120 V electrical outlet to  
power your fax machine. Using any other electrical  
outlet will cause damage to your fax.  
AC 120V  
For domestic use only  
Never use your fax machine outside the country in  
which you purchased it. Doing so may violate telecom-  
munication and safety regulations of that country, and  
variations in electrical and telephone standards can  
cause poor performance and damage to your fax.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not put furniture or equipment on the  
power cord  
Do not put anything on or over the electrical power  
cord, and do not route the power cord under rugs or  
carpets. Doing so can damage the power cord or fax,  
and can cause fire or electrical shock.  
Storing and handling toner and drum cartridges  
To avoid damage to your fax machine and to assure the best performance possible, fol-  
low these guidelines when storing and handling toner and drum cartridges:  
Store the cartridge  
Store the cartridge at a constant temperature within a range of 32” F to 95” F (0” C to  
35” C). To avoid dew do not store cartridges in locations subject to extreme fluctuation  
of temperature and humidity.  
Avoid temperature fluctuations  
Sudden changes in temperature can cause damaging  
condensation to form inside your fax machine.  
Do not stand the cartridge on its end and do not store it upside  
down.  
Do not open the protective bag of the cartridge until you are ready  
to install the cartridge.  
Allow clearance around the outlet  
Don t stack boxes or furniture around the outlet.  
Do not store cartridges in areas of:  
Direct sunlight  
Dusty conditions  
Near floppy disks or other computer media, computer screens, or any other materi-  
als sensitive to magnetic fields.  
DO NOT BURN TONER CARTRIDGES!  
The toner powder is extremely flammable. Exposure to flame  
can cause toner cartridges to burn or explode,  
causing serious injury.  
Use caution when carrying the fax  
Lift and carry the fax machine as described in your  
operating instructions. Some fax machines require two  
people to safely and properly carry.  
Be careful not to get the toner powder in your  
eyes.  
If the toner powder gets in your eyes, wash your eyes well and  
see a doctor.  
Use supplies manufactured  
specifically for Muratec fax machines  
Keep cartridges away from water or oil.  
Using toner cartridges and other supplies that are not  
manufactured specifically for Muratec machines may  
affect the operation of your unit.  
Do not expose cartridges to direct sunlight.  
Do not expose the cartridges to static or other  
electrical shock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This page intentionally blank.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
W elcome to your Muratec fax machine!  
These instructions are divided into the following sections.  
Find your serial number and write it down  
Getting started (page 1.1) describes how to set up your machine,  
operating tips and some important settings that you should perform  
before you use your machine.  
Please note that your machine sserial  
numberislocated on the bar code label  
as shown on the drawing at right. Use  
the blank at the bottom of this column to  
copy this down before you set up your  
machine.  
Basic operations (page 2.1) describes the basic operations of the  
transmission, reception and copying.  
Advanced features (page 3.1) describes the convenient features of  
your machine.  
Changing the default settings (page 4.1) describes how to change  
the settings of your machine.  
Bar code label  
Finally, Just in case  
(page 5.1) helps you if you ever have a  
problem with your machine. It also tells you how to give your machine  
the kind of easy, sensible care that should keep troubles to a mini-  
mum.  
Close up, the bar code label looks something  
like this, but with a different set of numbers:  
Please copy down your machine s serial number below for future reference, and note  
the machine s model number:  
Thanks for choosing Muratec.  
My machine s serial number: ______________________________________  
My machine s model number: ❑ Muratec MFX-1300  
❑ Muratec MFX-1700  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Getting started  
Printing a stored document .....................................2.8  
View the result of fax transaction .................................2.9  
Receiving faxes ...............................................2.10  
Answering calls manually .....................................2.10  
Reception modes ............................................2.10  
How to select the fax reception mode: ...........................2.11  
Ifthepaper runs out while fax reception ..........................2.11  
Making copies .................................................2.12  
Your machine s copier features .................................2.12  
Basic copy procedure ........................................2.12  
Single copy ................................................2.12  
Stacking multiple copies ......................................2.13  
Sorting multiple copies (using ADF) ..............................2.13  
Enlarged or reduced copies ...................................2.13  
Using the bypass tray ........................................2.14  
Memory overflow message ....................................2.15  
Ifthepaper runs out while copying ..............................2.15  
Making copy settings .........................................2.15  
Special copy function .........................................2.17  
Copy protection .............................................2.18  
Using your fax machine as a phone ................................2.19  
Dialing a telephone number ...................................2.19  
On-hook dialing .............................................2.19  
Redial .....................................................2.19  
Changing the dialing type .....................................2.19  
Call request ................................................2.20  
Dialing in the event of a power failure ............................2.20  
Attaching an optional handset ..................................2.20  
Attaching a second phone .....................................2.20  
Packaging contents .............................................1.1  
Parts of your machine ............................................1.1  
Control Panel Overview ..........................................1.3  
Setting up .....................................................1.5  
Pick an installation spot ........................................1.5  
Power tips ..................................................1.5  
Unlocking the mirror carriage ...................................1.5  
Installing the printing supplies ...................................1.6  
Attach the paper-handling parts .................................1.7  
Plug in and power up ..........................................1.7  
Turning off the transport mode ..................................1.8  
Adjust the monitor speaker s volume .............................1.8  
Loading paper ...............................................1.8  
Operating tips .................................................1.11  
Changing modes ............................................1.11  
Turning off the power .........................................1.11  
How to operate the machine ...................................1.11  
Entering characters ..........................................1.12  
Searching the functions using the cursor key ......................1.13  
Function table .................................................1.14  
EasyStart(Initialsettings) ........................................1.18  
Getting started ..............................................1.18  
Clearing stored settings .......................................1.18  
Entering initial settings ........................................1.18  
Basic Operations  
Sending faxes ..................................................2.1  
Guidelines ..................................................2.1  
Memory transmission .........................................2.3  
Memory overflow message .....................................2.3  
Quick memory transmission ....................................2.3  
Real time transmission (Non-memory transmission) .................2.3  
Sending a fax using the ADF .....................................2.4  
Sending a fax using the FBSglass ................................2.5  
Sending a fax using MONITOR/CALLkey or a handset ..................2.6  
Redialing ...................................................2.6  
Reviewing or canceling commands ...............................2.7  
Printing a delayed command list .................................2.8  
Advanced Features  
Autodialer .....................................................3.1  
Autodialer basics .............................................3.1  
Using one-touch keys .........................................3.2  
Using speed-dial numbers ......................................3.4  
Call group dialing .............................................3.7  
EasyDial directory dialing ......................................3.8  
Broadcasting ...................................................3.9  
Making changes to broadcasts ..................................3.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Delayed transmission ...........................................3.10  
Setting up a delayed transmission ..............................3.10  
Batch transmission .............................................3.11  
Creating or modifying a batch box ...............................3.11  
Printing a list of batch boxes ...................................3.12  
Storing a document for batch transmission ........................3.12  
Printing a list of stored batch documents .........................3.12  
Printing a document stored in a batch box ........................3.12  
Erasing a document stored in a batch box ........................3.13  
Erasing an empty batch box ...................................3.13  
Polling .......................................................3.14  
Regular polling ..............................................3.14  
Being polled ................................................3.14  
Printing a stored polling document ..............................3.14  
Erasing a stored polling document ..............................3.14  
Limiting polling access to your fax machine .......................3.15  
Special features ...............................................3.16  
Soft Keys ..................................................3.16  
Macro keys ................................................3.17  
Fax & Copy ................................................3.20  
Setting the activity journal .....................................3.20  
Setting the reports:TCRs ......................................3.21  
Cover page ................................................3.22  
OneLine + distinctive ring detection .............................3.23  
Call request ................................................3.24  
Page counter ...............................................3.24  
The power of QuadAccessfi ....................................3.25  
F-Code Boxes ..............................................3.25  
Programmable one-touch keys .................................3.35  
Security features ...............................................3.49  
The passcode ..............................................3.49  
Security reception ...........................................3.49  
Masking the PIN .............................................3.51  
Setting Block Junk Fax .......................................3.53  
Using department codes ......................................3.55  
Image Rotation ..............................................4.4  
Settings for dialing ..............................................4.5  
Changing the dialing pause length ...............................4.5  
Changing redial settings .......................................4.5  
Settings for copying .............................................4.6  
Copy scan settings ...........................................4.6  
Adjusting the copy print settings .................................4.6  
Changing the copy auto reset time ...............................4.7  
Setting copy auto .............................................4.7  
Setting sort copy .............................................4.7  
Setting Negative/Positive .......................................4.7  
Setting combine ..............................................4.8  
Settings for operation ............................................4.9  
Setting the silent mode ........................................4.9  
Setting Sleep mode (Energy saving mode) ........................4.10  
Primary mode ..............................................4.10  
Setting the paper source ......................................4.10  
Printing your settings .........................................4.11  
Just in case  
Clearing paper jams .............................................5.1  
If an original document jams ....................................5.1  
If a printout jams inside your machine .............................5.2  
Print quality problems ............................................5.3  
Troubleshooting ................................................5.5  
Errors ......................................................5.9  
Caring for your fax machine ......................................5.12  
Corrective cleaning ..........................................5.12  
If you have unsatisfactory printout quality .........................5.13  
Common questions .............................................5.14  
General questions ...........................................5.14  
Sending faxes ..............................................5.14  
W e re here to help you! .......................................5.14  
Receiving faxes .............................................5.16  
Polling ....................................................5.16  
Glossary .....................................................5.17  
Changing the default settings  
Appendix and index  
Settings for transmission .........................................4.1  
Scan settings ................................................4.1  
Memory transmission .........................................4.2  
Quick Memory transmission ....................................4.2  
TTI transmission .............................................4.2  
Settings for reception ............................................4.3  
Print settings ................................................4.3  
Setting the number of rings .....................................4.4  
Specifications ..................................................AI.1  
Regulatory information ...........................................AI.3  
Limited warranty ................................................AI.4  
Index .........................................................AI.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
This chapter describes how to  
set up your machine, operating tips  
and some important settings  
before you use your machine  
Packaging contents ...................................................1.1  
Parts of your machine .................................................1.1  
Control Panel Overview ................................................1.3  
Setting up ...........................................................1.5  
Operating tips .......................................................1.11  
Function table .......................................................1.14  
EasyStart(Initialsettings) .............................................1.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Packaging contents  
Parts of your machine  
Note: Any terms used here that are unclear to you right now will be explained in detail  
in the coming pages.  
1
4
18  
5
3
6
2
2
3
7
8
9
1
10  
11  
17  
12  
13  
S
R
O
F
E
P
T
4
5
6
7
16  
O
F
R
K
E
L
T
A
M
S
Y
O
H
/C  
N
A
O
S
O
O
M
L
T
E
L
O
C
R
T
T
M
O
R
R
R
P
V
T
A
A
E
T
N
Y
N
/P  
O
G
R
T
I
S
E
E
15  
R
M
A
IT  
G
N
A
T
S
S
S
I
V
E
M
F
IT  
C
IT  
M
A
IV  
E
U
X
E
R
EN  
&
C
IT  
S
E
Y
A
R
O
P
C
V
IN  
G
Y
O
Y
P
E
G
O
Y
D
/F  
14  
A
X
11  
8
9
10  
Control Panel The keys you use to operate your machine. (See pages  
1.3 1.4 for more details.)  
1
ADF(Automatic Document Feeder) The ADFautomatically feeds  
original document into the machine, one at a time. It can hold up to 50 pages.  
Included in your machine spackaging:  
1. Main unit with 500-sheet paper cassette installed  
2
Scanner cover Opens this cover to remove original document jams.  
3
4
2. Drum cartridge  
7. AC power cord  
3. Toner cartridge  
8. Operating instructions and Quick reference  
9. Paper size stickers  
Document guides Adjust these to fit the width of the original document so it  
will feed properly into the machine.  
4. Document tray  
5. Extension paper tray  
6. Telephone line cord  
10. One-touch labels  
Document tray Holds original documents placed for scanning into the  
machine.  
5
6
7
8
11. Soft Key labels  
Platen cover Opens to scan an original document using the FBS(Flatbed  
Scanner) glass.  
Note: Be sure to save the box (or boxes) and packing materials for reshipment.  
Original document exit Where your original document comes out after being  
scanned.  
Top cover Opens to provide access for changing the toner and drum cartridge  
(or, occasionally, fixing printout jams).  
1.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
ACpower switch Turns your fax machine on and of.f  
26  
9
10  
11  
ACpower jack Where you plug in the ACpower cord.  
Bypass tray Open and use the bypass tray to use the paper that cannot be  
set in the paper cassette. It can hold up to 50 sheetsofpaper.For details about  
paper capacity of the bypass tray, see Specifications, page AI.2.  
25  
Side cover Open to fix a printout jam.  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Side cover release Pull this to open the side cover.  
Top cover release Pull up on this to open the top cover.  
24  
Recording paper size sticker Shows the size of the paper that is set in the  
paper cassette.  
23  
Recording paper level indicator Shows the level of the current paper supply  
without requiring you to open the paper cassette.  
16  
17  
18  
LINE PHONE2 PHONE1  
22  
Paper cassette Set paper here. It can hold up to 500 sheets. For details about  
paper capacity of the paper cassette, see Specifications, page AI.2.  
FBS(Flatbed Scanner) glass Makes it possible for you to fax or copy objects  
and even irregularly shaped sheets, just as a conventional copier.  
19 20 21  
LINE jack Where you plug in the telephone line cord. The other end of the cord  
plugs into a wall telephone jack.  
19  
20  
PHONE2 jack If you connect a second telephone to your machine, this is where  
you plug in the cord.  
PHONE1 jack Where you plug in the optional handset.  
21  
22  
RS-232C interface port (optional) Where you plug in the RS-232C cable,  
when you use the optional RS-232C interface kit.  
PRINTERPARALLELport (optional) Where you plug in the printer cable, when  
you use the optional printer controller.  
23  
Extension paper tray Holds up the printout after it emerges.  
24  
25  
26  
Printed document exit Where the printout emerges.  
Handset (optional ) Used for voice communication. This handset is available  
from your authorized Muratec dealer, and can be added when you purchase the  
MFX-1300/1700 or as an upgrade afterward.  
1.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Control Panel Overview  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
28  
27  
26  
25 24 23  
22  
21 20 19 18 17  
16  
15  
Softkey3: COMBINE  
Press to turn the Combine feature on or of.f  
COPYlight Glows when the machine is in the Copy mode.  
FAX light Glows when the machine is in the Fax mode.  
1
2
3
Note: If your machine is MFX-1300, this key is FAX&COPYtoturn the Fax & Copy  
feature on or of.f  
BYPASS Press to change the paper size of the bypass tray.  
7
8
9
10  
11  
ALARMlight Glows when a problem occurs during fax communication, printing  
or scanning. The light stays on until the machine printsaCheck Message report.  
COPYCOUNT Press to see the number of totalprinted pages on the LCD.  
BROADCAST Press to send a broadcast fax (sending the same document to  
more than one location).  
COMM.light Glows when the machine is communicating with another machine.  
4
5
MEMORY RECEIVElight Glows when the machine is receiving an incoming fax  
document into itselectronic memory.  
GROUP Press to set up a fax transmission to a call group, a set of fax numbers  
which will receive the same document in one fax operation.  
Soft Keys Shortcut keys. Any function that can be turned on or off can be pro-  
grammed into these three keys. If the light above one of these keys glows, this  
indicates the setting that s been programmed into it (see page 3.16) is turned on.  
These keys are programmed at the factory to turn the following functions on or  
of:f  
6
ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS  
In Fax mode: Chooses from following several fax options delayed transmission,  
Polling, F-Code transmission, F-Code polling and Batch transmission.  
Or, in Copy mode: Chooses from following copy options Nega/Posi copy,  
Combine copy (only for MFX-1700) or Ultra copy (only for MFX-1700).  
Softkey1: ENERGYSAVING Pressing this key, you can make the machine to be  
in the Sleep mode immediately.  
Note: If the optional printer controller has been installed to your machine, this  
key will be ONLINEkey.  
COMM.CANCEL/CONFIRM. Press to stop the transmission, or to review pending  
fax commands and the activity journal.  
12  
START Press to begin a fax transmission, reception or copying.  
13  
14  
Softkey2: SORT  
Press to turn the Sort feature on or of.f  
STOP  
Stops the current operation and ejects a document from the ADF.  
1.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
COPYRESET Use in copy mode only.Press to reset the copy settings to their  
defaults.  
DOCUMENT/RESOLUTION  
In Fax mode: Press to toggle among the three resolution modes and grayscale.  
15  
16  
27  
28  
Numeric keypad Just like the numeric keys on a regular tone-dialing phone.  
Use these to dial phone and fax numbers and to enter numbers when you re set-  
ting up the machine.  
Or, in Copy mode: Press to select the type of your document.  
COPY/FAX Press this key to toggle between Fax mode and Copy mode.  
In Fax mode:  
SPEEDDIAL/TELINDEX  
17  
Startsaspeed-dialing operation, which you finish by  
pushing three of the keys on the numeric keypad. Also displays one-touch and  
speed-dial entries sorted alphanumerically, as in a telephone directory. (See page  
3.8.)  
Or, in Copy mode:  
ZOOM Press to turn on or offtheZOOMlight.  
When the ZOOMlight glows, you can set the copy reproduction ratio at 1% steps  
by using or key.  
When the ZOOMlight is not lit, you can choose one of several fixed copy repro-  
duction ratio by using or key.  
Program key Any function can be started by first pressing this key and then  
entering the function number.  
29  
30  
31  
18  
19  
Cursor Keys  
Scrolls (moves) through features and command options as dis-  
played on the LCD.  
ENTER It confirms user settings, begins operations and moves through com-  
mand levels.  
20  
21  
22  
CANCEL Press to delete characters on the LCDand cancel commands you have  
entered into the machine.  
flipta b A  
flipta b B  
flipta b C  
PAPERSIZE/NEXTDOC  
In Copy mode:  
Selects the printout paper you want to use.  
Macro Keys Programming the Macro keys (M1 and M2) can reduce many  
steps of the operation to a simple press of a key.You can teach the Macro keys  
to carry out one of the several operations (see pages 3.17 3.19).  
29  
30  
31  
While scanning a document:  
Press to tell your machine to scan one or more additional documentsafter the  
current scanning ends.  
Programmable One-Touch Keys The keys labeled P1 and P2, thislets you  
teach your machine an advanced multi-step function just once, then recall the  
function at any time by pressing one of these keys.  
DOCUMENTSIZE Instructsthe fax to scan letter-, legal or half-letter sized docu-  
ments when you use the FBS(flatbed scanner) glass.  
23  
24  
One-Touch Keys The keys labeled 01-55 offer one-touch dialing conve-  
nience. Also, you may use these keys to enter the characters when you are  
setting up the machine.  
Liquid crystal display (LCD) Shows the machine sstatus and lets you see  
what you re programming into the machine. The display shows 2 lines, 20 char-  
acters per line. If the LCDis blank, the machine is of.f  
Printer status lights Green lights indicate the acceptable paper sources. Red  
light will glow if the printer problem (such as paper jam) occurred.  
25  
26  
CONTRAST Press to adjust the contrast level.  
1.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Setting up  
Pick an installation spot  
Unlocking the mirror carriage  
Your fax machine is shipped with mirror carriage locking plate for protecting your  
machine s mirror carriage during shipping.  
Where should you install your fax machine? The location should be:  
Clean Dust buildup can damage your machine. (However, donot use a cover!)  
In the open Allow at least 12 inches of clearance around your machine. Be sure  
that you never cover the machine. Its vents must be able to breathe.  
Important: Do not turn the power on untilafter you have unlocked the mirror car-  
riage. Otherwise, damage could result.  
Away from direct sunlight This helps avoid overheating.  
Important: Gently close the top cover so that you don t catch your hands, possibly  
injuring them.  
Dry Avoid any location where splatters or sprays (such as from a water fountain)  
could reach your fax machine.  
Open the top cover. Loosen the screw which secures the mirror carriage locking  
1
Level, and vibration-free.  
plate, and then slide the plate.  
Near a phone jack Your fax machine uses a standard (modular) telephone jack,  
also known as an RJ-11.  
Near an ACpower outlet The ACpower cord is about 6 feet long when stretched  
toits limit, and the power cord should never be stretched to itslimit.  
Power tips  
LO  
CK  
UNLOCK  
Use a standard three-pronged 120 VAC outlet.  
Make sure the outlet isn t controlled by a wall switch.  
If it is, you ll risk occasional shutoffs to the machine, causing you to  
lose fax messages.  
Don t use an outlet which also is supplying power to a large  
appliance, such as a refrigerator or air conditioner.  
Such high-consumption appliances can cause draw-downs  
(temporary drops in the power available for other equipment on the  
circuit) which could damage your fax machine.  
After unlocking the mirror carriage, secure the mirror carriage locking plate  
mounting screw.  
2
IMPORTANT: BEFORE YOU USE THE MACHINE, YOU MUST TURN OFF  
THE TRANSPORT MODE(see page 1.8).  
Use an electrical surge suppressor, preferably one which guards both telephone  
and electrical lines. This device helps to shield your fax machine from damaging  
high-voltage electrical surges.  
Note: If you must ship your machine for some reason, turn on the transport mode,  
turn the power off and then lock the mirror carriage (undo the above procedure).  
1.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Installing the printing supplies  
Unpack a new toner cartridge from itscar-  
ton.Then, holding the toner cartridge with  
both hands, slowly shake it to distribute  
the toner evenly inside the cartridge.  
3
Your fax prints incoming faxes and copies with a reliable 600 dpiprint engine. Your fax  
requires two types of printing supplies (sometimes also called consumables):  
The drum cartridge It yields 20,000 normal letter-sized printouts (see  
Specifications, page AI.2). By normal, we re referring to the amount of text and/or  
graphics on each page. This is based on an industry-standard test document.  
Note: Do not touch the roller of the  
toner cartridge.  
The toner cartridge It yields 16,000 normal , letter-sized printouts (see  
Specifications, page AI.2).  
Note: The toner cartridge included with your machine is starter toner cartridge, which  
yields 3,000 printouts. Please purchase regular, full-yield toner cartridge from  
your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Gently installthe  
4
toner cartridge in the printer, making  
sure the toner cartridge stwo pins fit in  
theslits inside the printer frame.  
Toinstall these supplies:  
Important: Gently close the top cover so that you don t catch your hands, possibly  
injuring them.  
Pull up the top cover  
1
release and open the top  
cover.  
Unpack the drum cartridge from its carton.  
5
6
Note: Shield the drum cartridge from light, especially strong light. Later,ifyou  
have to remove the cartridge from the machine, immediately wrap it in a  
thick cloth to protect it from light.  
Slide the printer cover  
2
Gently install the drum cartridge in the  
printer, making sure the drum car-  
tridge sfourpinsfitintheslits inside the  
printer frame.  
release and open the  
printer cover.  
1.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Plug in and power up  
Gently clean the LED print head using  
the cleaning paper included in the toner  
cartridge carton box.  
For best print quality, you should clean  
the LED head every time you change  
the new toner cartridge.  
Note: Do not use abrasive materials  
on the LED print head, and do  
not subject the LED print head  
to strongly shock.  
7
Plug one end of the telephone line cord into the LINE jack on the machine srear  
side and the other end into a standard telephone wall jack.  
1
2
Plug the non-pronged end of the AC power cord into the AC power cord jack on  
the right rear side of the machine and the pronged end into a 120 V electrical out-  
let (preferably on a surge suppressor, as mentioned on page 1.5).  
Important: Be sure that you do not turn the power on (next step) until after you  
have unlocked the mirror carriage locking plate. (see page 1.5).  
Gently close the printer cover.  
8
9
Close the top cover. Besure to push on a portion of the cover to lock it into its  
original (closed) position.  
Note: The fax machine will not work if the cover isn t closed properly.  
Attach the paper-handling parts  
Attach the document tray by inserting it into the appropriate holes, as shown.  
1
2
Attach the extension paper tray by inserting its two pegs at a slightly upward  
angle into the appropriate holes, as shown.  
Use the AC power switch to turn on your machine. The markings are international  
standards: I means on, O means of.f  
3
Itwilltake a few seconds for the machine to warm up. The LCDshows:  
** Warming Up **  
When the machine is ready to use (standby mode), you will see:  
Copy Ready  
1
Ltr Auto 100%  
1.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Turning off the transport mode  
Loading paper  
Important: After unlocking the mirror carriage (see page 1.5), you must turn the  
transport mode off by following procedures.  
Acceptable paper size and cassette capacity  
Paper source Paper type  
Paper cassette Plain paper*1  
Paper size  
Capacity  
When the machine is in the transport mode, the LCDshows:  
Letter , Legal ,Half-letter  
Letter , Legal ,Half-letter ,  
500 sheets  
Mirror Locked  
Plain paper*1  
Bypass Tray  
A4 ,A5  
,A6 ,F4 ,  
50 sheets  
Executive , Custom-sized*2  
DL , CM10 , Monarch  
3.9″ × 5.8″ (100 × 148mm)  
To turn off the transport mode:  
Envelopes  
1 sheet  
Press Program key,*,E  
.
Postcard  
20 sheets  
20 sheets  
1
Transparency*3 Letter  
Mirror Locked :On  
1
* Paper weight: 60 90 g/m2  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
2
* (3.8 8.5) inches (5.5 14.0) inches (Width Length): It only can use if the optional  
Printer Controller is attached.  
Select Off by pressing or .Then press ENTERto turn off the transport mode.  
The mirror carriage will move to the home position.  
2
3
* W e recommend: 3M PP2500 for laser printers or equivalent  
Mirror Locked :Off  
Note: Do not use any paper which has been creased, wrinkled or has absorbed any  
moisture.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Important: If you must reship the machine, turn on this mode to move the mirror car-  
riage to the transport position (in step 2, above, press or to set the  
transport mode to On), then power off and lock the mirror carriage using  
the mirror carriage locking plate (see page 1.5).  
Loading paper in paper cassette  
Before you load paper,note the following:  
After you loaded paper in paper cassette, you must need to tell your machine  
which size of the paper,letter-, legal- or half letter-sized, you loaded.  
You can do this by the Setting of the paper size operation. (See next page.)  
Adjust the monitor speaker s volume  
You can set the volume of the monitor speaker.  
Note: If you will be using letter-sized paper,there s no need to adjust the cassette;  
your machine is initially set for Letter-sized paper. Simply attach the LTR  
sticker to the outside of the paper cassette.  
Press MONITOR/CALLon the control panel. You now should hear a dial tone.  
And press or of the cursor key.The LCDindicates the volume:  
1
Open the paper cassette from the front of your machine by gently pulling it toward  
you.  
1
** Tel Mode **  
■■  
■■  
■■  
Volume:  
To turn the volume up, press .  
To turn the volume down, press .  
2
3
Press MONITOR/CALLagain to hang up.  
1.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Helpful Tip: The paper level indicator on the front  
paper cassette lets you see how  
much paper is in the cassette without  
your having to open the cassette.  
When you see the paper level indica-  
tor drop (i. e., show more blue area),  
make sure you have a supply of  
paper nearby.Then, when you see  
the Please Supply Paper message  
on the display,youllbeready to refill  
the cassette.  
While pressing the release lever,  
slide the paper length guide to the  
position for the paper size you want  
to use.  
2
3
Press down the paperlifting plate.  
Paper level  
indicator  
Insert the paper into the cassette.  
4
Before you insert paper in the  
cassette, stack it so the leading  
edge and sides of the paper are  
even.  
Important: To avoid paper jams, do not refill this paper cassette without first remov-  
ing all of any paper which may remain in it. In other words, do not just  
add sheets to an already-loaded stack.  
Do not stack the paper over the  
limit mark inside of the cassette.  
Setting of the Paper Size  
Default setting: 1st cassette: Ltr (Letter-sized paper), 2nd cassette(option): Ltr, Bypass  
tray:Ltr  
Place the edges of the top sheet  
under the metaltabs on the cas-  
sette sleft and right side.  
When you change the size of paperinthepaper cassette, also you must change the  
paper size setting, below.  
Press Program key,B,1,0,1, ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
1st Cassette :Ltr  
Adjust the paper guides to fit the  
size of paper.  
5
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the recording paper size for the first cassette you want  
appears. In this example, we ve chosen Legal.  
2
1st Cassette :Legl  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.  
3
If you have the optional second cassette, proceed to step 4.  
Otherwise, skip to step 6.  
Gently push the paper cassette back into its original (closed) position. Youllfeela  
click when it s properly in place.  
6
7
Press or until the recording paper size for the second cassette you want  
appears. In this example, we ve chosen half letter .  
Attach the paper size sticker on the cassette sfront.  
4
2nd Cassette :HLtr  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.  
5
1.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Press or until the recording paper size for the bypass tray you want  
appears. In this example, we ve chosen Ltr.  
6
7
Bypass Tray :Ltr  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.  
Press STOPto return the machine to standby mode.  
Loading paper in bypass tray  
When you need to use a size of paper not currently loaded in your machine spaper cas-  
sette(s), or when you want to use a special type of paper (such as transparency film),  
use the bypass tray.  
Open the bypass tray on the right  
side of your machine.  
1
Pull out the hopper of the bypass  
2
tray and pull the flapper release  
lever.  
Place the paper on the bypass tray.  
Adjust the paper guide to fit the  
paper and insert the paperuntilit  
comes to a stop.  
3
Then push back the flapper release  
lever.  
Note: In Fax mode, if you have set the Letter, Legal or Half-letter sized paper in the  
bypass tray, the machine will use this paper when it runs out of the paper in the  
paper cassette during the fax reception.  
1.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Operating tips  
Changing modes  
How to operate the machine  
To press: 0 (zero),1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,# or*  
You can use this machine not only as a fax  
machine, but as a copier as well. Press  
COPY/FAX to change to the fax mode or  
copy mode.  
Use:  
Tip:  
The numeric keypad.  
COPY/FAX key  
At no other time within this manual will we refer to the letters printed below  
the numeric keys and their uses (such as accessing abc by pressing the 2  
key.) These letters are there only for your convenience in using your fax  
machine as a telephone.  
Fax mode:Ifyou want to use facsimile  
features, change to the Fax mode.  
Copy mode:Ifyou want to use copier  
function, change to the Copy mode.  
To press:  
Use:  
Tip:  
A
,
B
,
C
,
D
or any other letter key  
The one-touch key labeled with that letter.  
Please don t confuse the zero (0)with the letter  
O.  
When the machine is in the Fax mode, the  
FAX light on the control panel is on, and if the machine is in the Copy mode, the COPY  
lightison.  
Here s an example. If we say press Program key,A,1,0,1,ENTER  
you d press Program key  
Note: You cannot switch modes in any of the following cases:  
When scanning a fax message for transmission.  
During the real time transmission.  
then  
A
(one-touch key 01(A))  
then 1  
then 0(the numeric key zero)  
then 1  
When programming any function settings.  
and then ENTER  
Standby display of each mode:  
Note: Even though our example above includes commas, do not enter them into the  
fax machine. Those characters appear in our instructions to separate one num-  
ber from the other.They do not need to be entered into your fax machine.  
Fax Ready  
Copy Ready  
1
Jan 1 2001 0:00  
Ltr Auto 100%  
There is a function (broadcasting) which requires commas to be entered, but  
there is a special way to enter them. Wellexplain this process later.  
In Fax mode  
In Copy mode  
In other way, you can search almost all of your machine s function using the cursor key.  
See page 1.13.  
Turning off the power  
Fax documentsstored in memory will be lost 72 hours after you turn the power switch  
off or unplug the power cord. (See Specifications, page AI.1.)  
1.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Using CODEto enter characters  
Also, you can use the CODEkey to enter special characters or symbols.  
Entering characters  
Some settings give you a chance to enter characters; for your TTI, remote fax s name or  
others. To enter letters or other characters, use one-touch keys, numeric keypad or  
CODEkeys.  
When the machine prompts you to enter a name, press CODE.  
The LCDchanges to:  
1
Your Name ;Code  
_
Using one-touch keys to enter characters  
Open the one-touch cover and use the one-  
touch keys to enter letters and other  
non-numeric characters.  
Find the character you want to enter in the chart below.  
2
First keypress  
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
7
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
→
←
A
Ç
B
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
ÿ
C
D
↑
↓
á
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
a
o
¿
E
α
F
p
q
θ
Your Name ;Upper  
_
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
!
"
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
˚
β
ε
µ
σ
ρ
The word Upper means the machine will enter  
only upper-case letters.  
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
Ω
ü
Σ
π
x
`
.
To type a lower-case letter, press ALPHABET  
which is one of the one-touch keys.  
The display changes to:  
ALPHABET  
CODE  
\
″
Ö
Ü
J
j
Your Name ;Lower  
_
K
L
M
N
O
C
D
E
F
¥
]
^
_
î
ì
Ä
£
¥
¡
«
»
÷
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters.  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press ALPHABET.  
P
t
n
ƒ
˚
Å
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, use the one-touch keys.  
The legends in the black border indicate which key you press, and in which order,  
to get a given character.  
For example, to get a back-slash (\) character,you d press C, 8. (The blank areas  
for2,0 and C, 0 indicate spaces.)  
To enter each character, press the key combination listed on the chart.  
Important: Remember,there are three ways to enter characters:  
Canceling characters  
If you entered an incorrect letter or digit, press CANCELto erase to the left.  
To change just one character in name and/or digit, press or to move the cursor to  
that character or digit. Then press CANCELto erase it. Re-enter the character or digit cor-  
rectly.  
3
4
Enter  
Numbers  
Letters/characters  
Letters/characters/numbers  
Using  
Numeric keypad  
One-touch keys  
CODEchart for key combinations  
Press ENTERto save the name.  
1.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Searching the functions using the cursor key  
In this manual, we explain the operation with short-cut operations (for example, we will  
say, press Program key,A,1,0,1... ), however you can search and enter almost all  
of functions using the Program keyand Cursor key.  
Helpful Tip: When you want to search any function settings in your machine, you will  
need the function table (see next page) for your searching. Please use it  
for your help.  
Program key  
To search and enter the function settings:  
Press the Program key.  
1
Search the level one function  
2
groupsusing or of cursor key  
Cursor keys  
until your desired item appears.  
After you find the level one function item you want to program, press of cursor  
key to go to the level two function groups.  
3
Search the level two function groups using or of cursor key until your  
desired item appears.  
4
After you find the level two function item you want to program, press of cursor  
key to go to the level three function groups.  
5
Search the level three function groups using or of cursor key until your  
desired function appears.  
6
Note: You can go back to previous level function groups by pressing ofcur-  
sor key before you have entered the level three function by pressing  
ENTER.  
Press ENTERto entry the function setting.  
7
Note: You can press Program keytoentry the setting instead of ENTER.  
1.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Function table  
Level one function  
A.Autodial Entries  
Level two function  
1.One-touch Dial  
Level three function  
Summary of setting  
Default setting  
Page  
3.2  
01.Enter One-Touch  
(Max. 55 locations.)  
Select one-touch key and register the fax dial numbers and names,  
also group numbers on one-touch dial keys.  
If you register the name, you can use the telephone index feature.  
If you register the group number, you can use the group dialing.  
02.Erase One-Touch  
Erase the registration in a one-touch key.  
3.3  
3.4  
2.Speed Dial  
01.Enter Speed-Dial  
(Max. 145 locations.)  
Select speed-dial number and register the fax dial numbers and  
names, also group numbers as Speed-Dial numbers.  
If you register the name, you can use the telephone index feature.  
If you register the group number, you can use the group dialing.  
02.Erase Speed-Dial  
Erase the registration in a speed-dial number.  
3.5  
3.Program One-Touch 01.Enter P One-Touch  
Program several operations for a function you frequently use.  
This key can reduce several steps to a simple press of a key.  
3.35  
02.Erase P One-Touch  
Erase the programming in a programmable one-touch key.  
Select the size of paper in the paper cassette.  
3.48  
1.9  
B. User Settings  
1.Machine Settings  
01.Cassette Size  
02.Protect Passcode  
03.Soft Key  
Letter  
Enter the protection passcode for using the security features.  
3.49  
Program to turn on or off any functions with just pressing this key.  
Softkey1: ENERGYSAVING  
See lef.t  
3.16  
Softkey2: SORT  
Softkey3: FAX&COPY(for MFX-1300) /COMBINE(for MFX-1700)  
04.Silent Mode  
05.Sleep Mode  
06.Fax & Copy  
07.Primary Mode  
08.Service Mode  
Mute your machine.  
Off  
4.9  
Conserve power.  
On (30 min.)  
Off  
4.10  
3.20  
4.10  
Make a copy of your document each time it transmit.  
Determine the primary mode, Fax mode or Copy mode.  
None  
For technical support. Do not set this setting to on unless an  
authorized technician asks you to do so.  
Off  
09.Paper Source  
10.2-Bin Tray*1  
Select paper source (paper cassette and bypass tray) for  
fax reception or copying.  
For Fax / Copy  
4.10  
4.10  
Select the paper tray for delivery.  
Copy exit  
Lower tray  
Upper tray  
Upper tray  
Upper tray  
Received fax document exit  
Listexit  
PC-Fax print exit*2  
*1:This option appears only if the optional 2-Bin tray has been installed.  
*2: This option appears only if the optional RS-232C interface has been installed.  
1.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Page  
4.1  
Level one function  
B. User Settings  
Level two function  
2.Fax Settings  
Level three function  
01.Scan Parameters  
Summary of setting  
Default setting  
You can set the following settings for send fax message.  
Primary resolution mode  
Primary contrast mode  
Normal  
Normal  
02.Print Parameter  
You can set the following settings for receive fax message.  
Reduction rate  
Reduction margin  
Half-page reception  
Auto  
40 mm  
Off  
4.3  
03.# of Rings  
04.Redial  
Number of rings before your machine answers.  
Two times  
4.4  
4.5  
Number of times and interval for automatic fax redialing.  
Two times  
One minute  
05.Dialing Pause  
06.Memory Tx  
07.Quick Memory Tx  
08.TTI Tx  
Dialing pause length.  
Two times  
On  
4.5  
4.2  
4.2  
4.2  
4.1  
On/Offsettingfor Memory transmission.  
On/Off setting for Quick Memory transmission.  
On/Offsetting for sending your TTI.  
On  
On  
09.ECM Mode  
10.Block Junk Fax  
11.Security Rx  
12.PIN Mode  
On/Off setting for ECM mode.  
On  
Reject the fax reception from unauthorized incoming faxes.  
Keep all received fax messages in memory and after print them.  
Prevent unauthorized long-distance calls.  
Enter passcode for limiting polling access.  
On/OffsettingforRotate reception.  
Off  
3.53  
3.49  
3.51  
3.15  
Off  
Off  
13.Passcode  
14.Rotate Rx  
(for MFX-1700 only)  
Off  
Off  
4.4  
14.DRD (for MFX-1300) Set the ring pattern to use with phone company s Distinctive Ring  
15.DRD (for MFX-1700) service.  
3.23  
3.Copy Settings  
01.Scan Parameters  
Youcan set the following settings for copying.  
Primary document type  
Text  
4.6  
Primary contrast mode  
Normal  
02. Print parameter  
03.Auto Reset Time  
04.Copy Auto  
You can set the margin for copying.  
24 mm  
4.6  
4.7  
Set the time (minutes) of resetting the copy parameters.  
3 minutes  
Set the default setting to Auto for one of the following:  
Paper size Reduce/Enlarge ratio Document size  
Paper size  
4.7  
05.Copy Protect  
06.Sort Copy  
07.Nega/Posi  
On/Offsetting for Copy protection.  
On/Offsetting for Sorting copy.  
Off  
On  
2.18  
4.7  
On/Offsetting to reverse copy of black and white areas.  
On/Offsetting to combine.  
Off  
2.17, 4.7  
08.Combine  
(for MFX-1700 only)  
01.TCP/IP*3  
Off  
2.17, 4.8  
4.Printer Settings  
Enter the IP Address, Subnet mask and Gate way address.  
*3:This option appears only if the optional NIC (network interface card) has been installed.  
1.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Level one function  
C. Other Settings  
Level two function  
Level three function  
01.Journal Auto Print  
02.Journal Line Up  
03.Report AutoPrint  
Summary of setting  
Default setting  
Page  
3.20  
1.Journal & Reports  
Print the Activity journal automatically after 100 transactions.  
Change the printing order of the activity journal.  
Off  
Off  
3.21  
Print the TCR (Transmit Confirmation Report) automatically  
after transmitting.  
Off  
Off  
3.21  
2.Cover Page  
01.Set Cover Page  
02.Enter Cover Page  
01.Set Dept. Protect  
02.Set Dept. Code  
03.Set Dept. Setting  
04.Erase Dp.TimeList  
01.Set F-Code Box  
02.Erase F-Code Box  
01.Set Batch Box  
On/Offsetting for sending the Cover page.  
Enter your message for the cover page.  
Protection for department code settings.  
Register the Department code.  
3.22  
3.22  
3.56  
3.55  
3.55  
3.56  
3.26  
3.32  
3.11  
3.13  
3.14  
3.29  
3.Department Code  
Off  
Off  
On/Offsetting for Department code activation.  
Clear the total counts of each department code.  
Create the F-Code box.  
4.F-Code Box  
5.Batch Tx  
Erase an empty F-Code box.  
Create the Batch box.  
02.Erase Batch Box  
01.Polling Document  
02.F-Code Document  
Erase an empty batch box.  
D. Doc. Management 1.Store Document  
2.Erase Document  
Store the document to be retrieved by other fax machine.  
Store the document to be retrieved by other F-Code compatible  
fax machine.  
01.Polling Document  
02.F-Code Document  
03.Batch Document  
01.Polling Document  
02.F-Code Document  
03.Batch Document  
04.Security Rx Doc.  
Erase stored document for polling transmission.  
Erase stored document in the F-Code box.  
Erase stored document in the Batch box.  
3.14  
3.31  
3.13  
3.Document Print  
Print the stored document for polling transmission.  
Print the stored document in the F-Code box.  
Print the stored document in the Batch box.  
3.14  
3.30, 3.31  
3.12  
Print the fax received document during Security reception (and  
return to your machine to normal reception mode until the next  
time).  
3.50  
05.Com. Stored Doc.  
01.Machine Settings  
02.Fax Settings  
Print the stored document for delayed transmission.  
Print a list of your machine settings.  
Print a list of the fax settings.  
2.8  
E. Print  
1.List Print  
4.11  
4.11  
4.11  
3.21  
2.8  
03.Copy Settings  
04.Journal  
Print a list of the copy settings.  
Print the activity journal manually.  
05.Commands List  
06.One-Touch List  
07.Speed-Dial List  
08.P One-Touch List  
Print a list of the delayed commands.  
Print a list of the one-touch dial keys.  
Print a list of the speed-dial numbers.  
Print a list of the programmable one-touch keys.  
3.3  
3.5  
3.48  
1.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Level one function  
E.Print  
Level two function  
1.List Print  
Level three function  
09.Group List  
Summary of setting  
Default setting  
Page  
3.7  
Print a list of the group numbers.  
Print a list of the blocked numbers.  
Print a cover page.  
10.Block Junk Dial List  
11.Cover Page  
3.54  
3.22  
12.Depart.Time List  
Print a total communication time and printed pages of each  
department code.  
3.56  
13.F-Code Box List  
14.F-Code Doc. List  
15.Batch Box List  
16.Batch Doc. List  
17.Macros List  
Print a list of F-Code boxes.  
3.29  
3.29  
3.12  
3.12  
3.19  
Print a list of the document stored in the F-Code boxes.  
Print a list of Batch boxes.  
Print a list of the document stored in the batch boxes.  
Print a list of Macro keys.  
2.Printer Functions 01.Demo Page*4  
02.Status Page*4  
Print the highlight features and functions of the printer.  
Printallthestatus and configuration of the printer.  
Print the list of all PCL fonts currently installed in the printer.  
Print the NIC (network interface card) settings.  
Scanning a document into the PC.  
03.Font List*4  
04.NIC Status*5  
F. PC-FAX Commands*6  
I. User Install  
1.PC-FAX  
01.PC-FAX Scan  
02.PC-FAXInitial  
03.Set RS-232C  
Initializing your machine.  
Setting of the RS-232C parameters.  
Set-up the following settings:  
Language on the LCD and Lists  
Current Day and Time  
Automatically Daylight saving time  
Your TTI (your name)  
English  
Off  
1.18  
Subscriber ID (your fax number)  
Phone dialing type  
Fax reception mode  
Tone  
Fax Ready  
5 minutes  
Time for the machine to enter the sleep mode  
*4:These option appears only if the optional printer controller has been installed.  
*5:This option appears only if the optional NIC (network interface card) has been installed.  
*6:This option appears only if the optional RS-232C interface has been installed. For details see the operating instructions that is included with the optional RS-232C kit.  
1.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
EasyStart(Initialsettings)  
EasyStartsoftware is already installed on your Muratec fax machine. It guides you  
through the process of entering your machine ssettings.  
Entering initial settings  
These settings you make here can always be changed later.  
Important: If you press STOPduring EasyStart, your fax machine returns to standby  
mode(its normal condition). But it will keep the settings you saved by  
pressing ENTERas described in these instructions.  
Getting started  
Determine the following before you go any further:  
Press Program key,I,ENTER.  
The LCDshows the current language setting.  
1
Language :English  
The type of dialing your telephone system requires Choose either tone or  
pulse (rotary) dialing.  
1
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
The name and fax number you want to appear on your faxes  
Every fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of text  
at the very top of the page. Thistextlistsaname, called the Transmit Terminal  
Identifier(TTI),and a fax number.The TTI cannot be longer than 22 characters.  
Press or until the language you want appears.  
2
2
3
4
Press ENTERto save the setting and continue EasyStart.  
The LCDnow shows the current calendar/clock setting, with a cursor appearing  
under the first digit.  
Clearing stored settings  
Before using EasyStart, clear your machine sbuilt-inuser data memory.This ensures  
the memory will hold only your settings.  
Enter Time  
01/01 ’01 00:00  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the correct date and time, using a MMDDYYformat  
forthe date and 24-hour format for the time. For instance, toset 8:30 PMon June  
11, 2002, press 0 6 1 1 0 2 2 0 3 0, which resultsin:  
Important: After you use EasyStart,do not clear the memory again unless an autho-  
rized technician asks you to do so.  
To clear the machine s memory:  
5
Enter Time  
Press Program key,*,2.The LCDnow asks if you want to clear the memory:  
1
06/11 ’02 20:30  
Clear User Settings  
Check Enter/Cancel  
Note: Your fax machine automatically inserts the spaces and date-slash. All you  
have to do is enter the digits.  
Note: Ifyoudont want to clear the memory,just press CANCEL.  
To change a digit, press to move the cursor left,or to move it right.  
Then enter the correct digit.  
Ifyoudo want to clear the memory,press ENTER.  
2
Press ENTERto save the clock setting and continue.  
6
1.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
The LCDnow asks you to enter the type of dialing needed for the fax machine,  
The LCDnow asks if you want to set the calendar/clock to automatically  
recognize daylight saving time (DST).  
7
8
15  
16  
either tone orpulse:  
Daylight Saving :Off  
Phone Type  
:Tone  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
When the setting is On, your machine automatically recognizes DSTat2AMon the  
appropriate switchover Sundays each year.  
When the setting is Off, no automatic change will occur.  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Here, we ve changed the setting to Pulse mode:  
Phone Type  
:Pulse  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Here, we ve changed the setting to On:  
Press ENTERto save the setting and continue.  
Daylight Saving :On  
17  
18  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
The LCDnow shows the machine s current reception mode.  
Press ENTERto save the setting and continue.  
Fax Ready  
9
10  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
The LCDnow asks you to enter your fax number as you want it to appear on other  
fax machines displays or printouts.The fax industry term for this  
number is Subscriber ID.  
For now,press or until the setting Fax Readyappears. (This setting can  
always be changed. We ll discuss reception modes further on pages 2.10 2.11.)  
19  
Your Fax Number  
Press ENTERto save the setting and continue.  
20  
21  
The LCDnow asks you to enter the time for the sleep mode. Your machine will  
automatically enter sleep mode after your selected idle time has elapsed.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number.The number may contain up to  
20 characters.  
11  
Sleep Mode Timing  
(001-240) 005 min.  
Your Fax Number  
9725555525_  
Enter the time (in minutes) using the numeric keypad.  
22  
23  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCELto erase to the left.  
To change just one number,press to move left,or to move right.  
Press CANCELto erase the number.Then re-enter the fax number cor-  
rectly.  
Press ENTERto save the setting. Your machine will return to standby mode.  
Press ENTERto save the number.  
12  
13  
The LCDnow asks you to enter the name you want to appear at the top of faxes  
you send. The name may be up to 22 characters in length.  
Use the one-touch keys to enter letters and other non-numeric characters.  
(Refer to Entering characters on page 1.12.)  
Your Name ;Upper  
_
Press ENTERto save the setting and continue.  
14  
1.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
This chapter describes the basic  
operation of the transmission,  
reception and copying  
Sending faxes .......................................................2.1  
Receiving faxes .....................................................2.10  
Making copies ......................................................2.12  
Using your fax machine as a phone .....................................2.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Sendingfaxes  
How to set the document  
Guidelines  
You can send a fax message using the ADF(Automatic Document Feeder) or FBS  
(Flatbed Scanner) glass. Before you begin the fax sending, please read the following  
guidelines.  
When setting the documentsinthe ADF(Automatic Document Feeder)  
Insert your document(s) face up,  
1
top edge first. If you re sending  
Acceptable document sizes  
You can set up to 50 sheetsofletter-, legal-orhalfletter−sized document in the ADFat  
one time. However,its possible to fax a piece of paper as small as a notepad sheet or  
one up to three feet long.  
a multi-page documents, fan the  
pages slightly.  
Adjust the document width guide  
to fit your documents.  
2
The acceptable dimensions (width× length) are:  
Automatic document feeder (ADF)  
SINGLE-SHEET  
MULTIPLE-SHEET  
Note: The ADFcan hold up to 50 pages of normal weight paper.  
When setting the documentsonthe FBS(Flatbed Scanner) glass  
Maximum: 8.5″ × 35.4″  
Maximum: 8.5″ × 14.0″  
Minimum: 5.8″ × 4.1″  
Minimum: 4.7″ × 3.9″  
Flatbed scanner (FBS)  
Maximum: 8.5″ × 14.0″  
Make sure the document is not  
intheADF.  
1
Things not toput in your fax  
Lift the platen cover.  
To avoid paper jams and damage to your machine, don tinsert:  
Folded, curled, torn, wrinkled or very thin pages  
Documentswith staples, glue, tape, paper clips orstill-wet correction fluid  
Sticky notes (or documentswith sticky notes attached)  
Cardboard, newspaper or fabric  
2
Set your document face down  
3
on the FBSglass. The document  
should be aligned to the front  
right corner.  
Gently close the platen cover.  
Pages with duplicating carbon on either side  
Credit cards or any small, thick items  
4
Important: Gently close the platen cover so that you don t catch your hands,  
possibly injuring them.  
OHP transparency film  
2.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Resolution, grayscale  
Mixing resolution and contrast in a multiple page  
When you send the document with more than one page, you can select different resolu-  
tions and contrasts for each page.  
Reviewing resolution and grayscale:  
Normalresolution (NORM on the control panel) is suitable for most typed  
documents and simple drawings.  
Insert your documents, select resolution and contrast for first page, dial and press  
START.Then follow one of the following two procedures.  
Fine resolution (FINE on the control panel) is ideal for maps, moderately compli-  
cated drawings, floorplans or handwritten documents.  
When the document is placed in the ADF:  
Superfine resolution (S FINE on the control panel, S Fine on the LCD)  
reproduces the detail of extremely complicated drawings or line art.  
-
Select resolution and contrast before the next page is scanned.  
When the document is placed on the FBSglass:  
Grayscalemode(HALFTONE on the control panel; Gray on the LCD) captures shades  
in photos and drawings.  
Remove the previous page and place the next page.  
1
2
Note: If you send a fax in superfine, certain fax models (especially older, non-Muratec  
models) receive it only in fine mode. However, you can send a fax in grayscale  
mode to virtually any fax machine currently in use.  
Select resolution and contrast. Then press NEXTDOC.  
HALFTONE  
S-FINE  
Dialing pause  
Some long-distance systems require dialing pauses, and pauses can also be useful  
when you re dialing through special telephone exchanges.  
To change the resolution setting, press RESOLUTIONrepeatedly.  
A glowing LEDindicates the fax is using the setting named by that  
FINE  
NORMAL  
LED. For example, in the drawing (right), the machine is set for FINE  
resolution.  
To insert a pause,assign REDIAL/PAUSEto a Soft key (see page 3.16), and then press  
REDIAL/PAUSE.(The pause character (-/) will appear on the LCD.) Each pause entered  
lasts for a factory-set two seconds.  
DOCUMENT  
RESOLUTION  
For example, pressing 9,REDIAL/PAUSE,19725552009dials9 [2-second pause] 1 9 7 2  
5 5 5 2 0 0 9.  
Helpful Tip: You can change the dialing pause length within 2 to 10 seconds.  
(see Changing the pause length, page 4.5.)  
Contrast  
Setting the contrast allows you to compensate for any excessive lightness or darkness,  
as the case may be, of document pages you are sending or copying.  
Potential problems with call-waiting and voice mail  
DARK  
Telephone call-waiting signals can stop fax transmission and reception. And any service  
such as voice mail which may intercept your calls can keep your fax machine from  
receiving fax calls.  
To change the contrast setting, press CONTRASTrepeatedly.  
A glowing LEDindicates the fax is using the setting named by that  
LED.  
NORMAL  
LIGHT  
If you use only one line for both phone and fax, consult your telephone company to see  
how you can temporarily disable call-waiting or voice mail while using the fax machine.  
Note: To avoid confusing the Light and Dark settings, just  
CONTRAST  
remember Light lightens and Dark darkens to  
keep it straight.  
2.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Memorytransmission  
Quick memory transmission  
Your fax machine has a great memory! Take advantage of it, and you could:  
Using Quick Memory transmission can save you time over standard memory transmis-  
sions.  
Save Time. By using your fax machine s memory,you won t have to wait for your  
machine while it completes the transmission. Simply scan your document into your  
machine s memory,and you can walk away with your original in hand.  
For a normal memory transmission,your fax: (1) scans your entire document into mem-  
ory,(2) dials the other fax machine, then (3) transmits the document.  
Save Money.Ifyouretransmitting to another memory-equipped fax machine, your  
machine will send the document directly into the other machine s memory and hang up.  
(The receiving machine then prints out your message from its memory after the call has  
ended.) This cuts your actual on-line time to a minimum.  
But with Quick Memory transmission, your machine doesn t wait to scan all pages into  
memory before dialing. After it scans the first page of your document, your machine  
dials the call. While dialing, connecting and transmitting, your fax machine continues to  
scan in the remaining pages of the document.  
Save Even More Money.Set up a delayed transmission (see page 3.10) to send your  
document after hours, and you can save more money, because the line charges will be  
cheaper.  
The quick memory transmission is On for default setting. However, you can turn offit  
for the default. (See page 4.2.)  
Important: To use Quick Memory transmission, the memory transmission feature  
must be turned on.  
Note: Some documentsuseupmemory more quickly than others. They include  
documents with many pages and those with many dark areas. When the  
machine s memory is full, it can transmit only through the document feeder.  
The memory transmission is On for default setting. However, you can turn offitforthe  
default. (See page 4.2.)  
Real time transmission (Non-memory transmission)  
In the following cases, the machine does not use its memory for sending a fax:  
Helpfultip: If you frequently turn this feature on and off, you can set a Soft key (see  
page 3.16) to turn on or off by simply pressing that key.  
When you turned off the memory transmission  
When you are sending a fax using MONITOR/CALLkey or optional handset (see page  
2.6.)  
When the machine smemory is full  
Memory overflow message  
In normal memory transmission, if you ve stored too much information in your machine s  
memory, a Memory Overflow message may appear on the LCD:  
ItiscalledReal time transmission mode. In this mode, the next page is not scanned in  
while the current page is being transmitted.  
Note: In this mode, only one destination can be dialed.  
Memory Overflow  
Start Or Cancel  
Note: Real time transmission available only when using the ADF. When transmitting  
use the FBSglass, the machine always uses Memory transmission mode even if  
you set the memory transmission to of.f  
This appears because (1) too many pages have been stored in the memory,or (2) the  
pages that are stored have too much information on them for your fax machine to  
remember.  
If this message appears, press STARTto tell your fax to keep as many pages in memory  
as possible, or press CANCELto erase from memory all pages stored during the current  
operation (but not previous operations).  
Note: If you don t operate your machine within 60 seconds, the machine automatically  
erase the document stored in the memory during the current operation.  
Dividing a large document into smaller batches will help you avoid this error.  
2.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Sending a fax usingthe ADF  
Now, everything is up to the machines yours and the one you re dialing.  
6
If the fax has been set for Quick Memory transmit, your machine scans the  
firstpage of your document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it  
makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from memory  
while at the same time scanning the remaining pages of your document into  
memory.(In default setting, the Quick Memory transmission isOn. If you want  
to turn off this feature, see page 4.2.)  
If the fax has been set for the normal memory transmit, your fax scans the  
entire document into memory, then dials the other fax. When it makes contact,  
your machine transmits the entire stored document from memory.  
Ifthefaxissetfor Real time transmit (non-memory transmission),your  
machine simply dials the other fax. When it makes contact, your machine  
feeds the document through, scanning and transmitting it as it goes.  
Press COPY/FAX to change to Fax mode.  
1
2
Note: The more stuff (calledblack coverage) your machine sees on a page,  
the more slowly the page feeds through as the fax scans it. And even if  
the page is relatively clean, sending it in grayscale mode or at certain  
resolutions makes your machine see more stuff.  
Insert the document face up, top edge first.And adjust the document guides  
by sliding either of them to the leftorright to fit the page(s) you ll be faxing.  
Your fax machine sADF(Automatic Document Feeder) will hold up to 50 pages  
with letter-sized paper.  
The same is true if you set the contrast to Dark.  
When a document is in the feeder,theLCDshows the scanning width(see A4 in  
the Glossary beginning on page 5.17) and the amount of memory available:  
Important: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the document,  
press the STOPkey.  
Document Ready  
If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the Review  
Commandsfunction. See Reviewing or canceling commands,  
page 2.7.  
A4  
Mem100%  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
3
4
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:  
7
Enter the fax number.  
919725552009  
** Complete **  
Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone  
call. (Example: Enter 9 to dial out from an office telephone system, or 1 for long-  
distance.)  
Important: Whenever you transmit a document, what actually appears on the  
top line of the display depends on information stored in the remote  
fax.The line may even be blank.  
Press Start  
919725552009_  
Note: If the call fails, see Redialing, page 2.6.  
Press START.  
5
By pressing START, you ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your  
machine gives this action a command number as it scans the fax document.  
This command number appears on the first line of the LCDfor a few seconds:  
== Command:01 ==  
You ll need to know this command number if you later wish to cancel the trans-  
mission or to print a stored document (see pages 2.7 2.8).  
2.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Sending a fax using the FBSglass  
Enter the fax number.  
7
8
Also, enter any access codes necessary, just as you would for a regular phone  
call. (Example: Enter 9 to dial out from an office telephone system, or 1 for long-  
distance.)  
Press Start  
919725552009_  
Press START.  
By pressing START, you ve just given your machine a command. In turn, your  
machine gives this action a command numberasitscans the fax document.  
This command number appears on the first line of the LCD for a few seconds:  
== Command:01 ==  
You ll need this command number to cancel the transmission or to print a stored  
document (see pages 2.7 2.8).  
Press COPY/FAX to change to Fax mode.  
1
2
3
4
Then your machine will scan the document into the memory.  
While your machine scans the document, the LCDwill show:  
Ifthere s a document in the ADF, remove it.  
919725552009  
Ltr NextDoc Mem100%  
Open the platen cover.  
Place the document face downonthe FBSglass and align it with the document  
scale on the right, then gently close the platen cover.  
The document should be aligned to the right front corner.  
When the scanning is done, the LCDwill show:  
9
→
Start Scan NextDoc  
Important: Gently close the platen cover so that you don t catch your hands,  
possibly injuring them.  
→
Tx Start  
Start  
When a thick document, such as a book, is on the FBSglass,  
do not press strongly from the top of the platen cover.This may  
break the FBSglass and cause an injury.  
If you want to send more pages, proceed to step 10.  
Otherwise, press STARTtostart the transmission, and skip to step 11.  
Place the next page, then press NEXTDOCtostart scanning.  
Note: If necessary, select the document size (see step 5).  
10  
11  
Press DOCUMENTSIZE to select the document size, letter (displayed as Ltr), legal  
(Legl) or half-letter (HLtr). (Half-letter is 8.5″ wide 5.5″ tall.)  
5
To send any more pages, repeat steps 9-10.  
Otherwise, press STARTtostart the transmission, and skip to step 11.  
Now, everything is up to the machines yours and the one you re dialing.  
When it makes contact, your machine transmits the stored document from mem-  
ory.  
Important: If you want to cancel a transmission while scanning the document,  
press the STOPkey.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
If you want to cancel a transmission in progress, use the Review  
Commandsfunction. See Reviewing or canceling commands,  
page 2.7.  
6
2.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:  
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:  
12  
7
919725552009  
** Complete **  
919725552009  
** Complete **  
Note: If the call fails and you used MONITOR/CALLto dial, press MONITOR/CALLto  
hang up. Or if you ve pressed STARTto begin the fax transmission, press  
STOPtoendit.  
Important: Whenever you transmit a document, what actually appears on the  
top line of the display depends on information stored in the remote  
fax.The line may even be blank.  
Also see Redialing manually, below,ifthecallfails.  
Note: If the call fails, see Redialing, page 2.6.  
Redialing  
Sending a fax using MONITOR/CALLkey or a handset  
You also can fax a document using either the monitor speaker or the optional  
handset to dial the call.  
Automatically fax redialing  
If your fax call fails, your machine automatically redials it. In this Auto Redial mode,your  
faxautomatically redials the number up to two times at one minute intervals.  
Note: If you want to use MONITOR/CALLkey, you should assign it to a Softkey in  
advance. (See page 3.16.)  
Note: You can change the redial time and interval settings. (See Changing redial set-  
tings, page 4.5.)  
Note: In this function, you cannot send a fax using the FBSglass.  
Insert the document to the ADF.  
1
2
3
While in the Auto Redial mode, the machine can continue to receive faxes and can  
make as many as 99 fax transmissions.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Note: If you used either the MONITOR/CALLkey or a handset to dial the call, you must  
redial manually (see below).  
Obtain a dial tone, either by:  
Pressing MONITOR/CALL  
Note: If the last redial attempt fails, your machine may print (and/or display) error  
messages.  
or  
Lifting the optional handset.  
Redialing manually  
In either case, the LCDshows:  
You can always redial calls manually.And you mustredial manually if you used either  
the MONITOR/CALLkey or an optional handset to dial the failed call.  
** Tel Mode **  
_
Note: To use REDIAL/PAUSEkey, you should assign it to a Soft key in advance. (See  
page 3.16.)  
Enter the fax number by using the numeric keypad.  
Also, enter access codes with the number, just as for a regular phone call.  
4
To redial a fax call manually without using the MONITOR/CALLkey or an optional  
handset:  
** Tel Mode **  
919725552009_  
Set the document and set the resolution and contrast.  
1
2
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.  
5
Press REDIAL/PAUSE.The LCDwill show:  
Note: If a person answers the phone, use the optional handset to tell that per-  
son that you re trying to send a fax. When you hear fax tones, press  
START.  
View Redial History  
0:1234567890  
If you re using an optional handset, hang up after pressing START.  
6
2.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Reviewing or canceling commands  
Your machine can remember the last 10 dial numbers. Press or untilthe  
dial number you want to redial appears.  
3
4
Your fax machine can store many jobs in its memory.And it keeps track of each one  
by assigning it a command number,like C01.  
Press START.  
Delayed commands, redial attempts and current fax transmissions are all stored in your  
fax machine s memory and given a command number.Your machine can store up to 99  
delayed commands. It identifies each by a two-digit command numberranging from 01 to  
99.  
To redial a fax call manually with the MONITOR/CALLkey or an optional  
handset:  
Make sure the document is in the ADFand that the resolution and contrast are  
set.  
The Review Commandsfunction gives you the power to check on each job (or  
command) in your machine s memory.Italsolets you cancel a command if you decide  
not to send the document.  
1
Press MONITOR/CALLorlift the optional handset to get a dial tone.  
2
Note: If you want to use MONITOR/CALLkey, you should assign it to a Softkey in  
advance. (See page 3.16.)  
To see your machine s stored commands or to cancel them:  
Press COMM.CANCEL/CONFIRM.The LCDwill show:  
1
Press REDIAL/PAUSE.The LCDwill show:  
3
C01:5552009  
View Redial History  
0:1234567890  
/ /ꢂ/Cancel  
ꢀ ꢁ  
The LCDshows the first command, indicated by its command number and the  
phone number it will dial.  
Your machine can remember the last 10 dial numbers. Press or untilthe  
dial number you want to redial appears.  
4
If your machine is attempting to perform a command now, it appears on the  
display.  
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.  
5
Note: If a person answers the phone, use the optional handset to tell that per-  
son you re sending a fax. When you hear fax tones, press START.  
Note: If there are no stored commands in your machine, the LCDwill show:  
No Command  
To redial a voice call manually using the optional handset:  
Lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.  
Press STOPto return to standby mode.  
Or, if you want to see the result of fax transaction, press COMM.  
CANCEL/CONFIRM.(See View the result of fax transaction on page 2.9.)  
1
2
Press REDIAL/PAUSE.The LCDwill show:  
View Redial History  
0:1234567890  
Here, you see command 01,followed by the number it sset to dial. If the com-  
mand is to send a broadcast, Broadcast appears instead of the phone number.  
(See Broadcasting, page 3.9.)  
Your machine can memory the latest 10 dial numbers. Press or untilthedial  
number you want to redial appears.  
3
If the command is to send a batch transmission, the LCDshows itsbatch box  
number(such as B01 ) rather than the command number. (See Batch transmis-  
sion, pages 3.11 3.13.)  
Press START.  
4
When the other person answers, use the optional handset to speak to that per-  
son.  
If the command is for a Call group dialing, the group number (such as G01 )  
appears instead of the phone number. (See Call group dialing, page 3.7.)  
Press or to scroll through currently stored commands.  
2
2.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Printing a delayed command list  
If you want to cancel the command shown, press CANCEL.The LCDshows:  
3
4
Your machine can print a command list which tells you:  
C01:9-5552311  
Check / /ꢂ/Cancel  
ꢀ ꢁ  
The command sidentification number  
The phone number,or remote location  
To go ahead with canceling the command, press CANCELagain. Go back to step 2  
to view other delayed commands.  
The start time (this appears in a DD,HH:M Mformat)  
A note telling if the command is a polling orF-Codeoperation (see pages 3.14 3.15  
for more on polling and 3.25 3.34 for more on F-Code communication).  
Tokeepthis command but to continue reviewing stored commands, press or  
.Go back to step 2.  
To print a delayed command list, press Program key,E,1,0,5ENTER.  
To keep this command and stop reviewing commands, press STOPto return your  
machine to standby mode.  
Note: See also Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast, below.  
Printing a stored document  
Your fax machine can print out each document stored for delayed transmission.  
To print a stored document, you ll need to know the document s command number,  
which you can get by either reviewing the commands or printing a delayed command  
list (see above).  
Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast  
You also can review or cancel certain numbers within a broadcast:  
Press COMM.CANCEL/CONFIRM.  
1
2
Press Program key,D,3,0,5ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Press or to scroll through currently stored broadcast command.  
Com. Stored Doc.  
Note: Stop this operation at any time by pressing STOP.  
Command No.  
:_  
C01:Broadcast  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the command s identification number,1 99.For  
example, we could enter the following for the very first command, 1:  
/ /ꢂ/Cancel  
ꢀ ꢁ  
2
3
If you want to cancel the command shown, press CANCEL,CANCEL.  
3
Com. Stored Doc.  
Command No.  
If you want to review individual numbers within this broadcast, go on to  
step 4 without pressing CANCEL.  
:1_  
Press ENTER.Your fax machine will print a copy of the stored document.  
To review individual numbers within this broadcast, press (orBROADCAST)to  
see the first number.The LCDshows:  
4
9-5550388  
/ /ꢃ/Cancel  
ꢀ ꢁ  
Press or until you find the number you want to cancel.  
5
6
Press CANCEL,CANCEL.The next number will appear.  
If you want to cancel this number, also, repeat this step.  
If you want to cancel a different number, goback to step 5.  
If you want to go back to reviewing or canceling other command, press .  
If you don t want to cancel any more numbers, press STOP.The machine returns  
tostandby mode.  
2.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
View the result of fax transaction  
You can see 70 most recent fax transactions and result of each transactions with the fol-  
lowing information.  
Assigned number,starting each day at 001  
Remote location called (The destination name)  
Starting date and time  
Result of the call If preceded by an asterisk (*),this signifies an ECMcommunica-  
tion. If preceded by a pound (#), this signifies communication was via the highspeed  
V.34 modem.  
Note: Your machine sLCDshortens the word Transmission toTx and the Reception to  
Rx.  
Press COMM.CANCEL/CONFIRM.twice.The LCDshows:  
1
Communication Result  
Comm.Cancel/Enter  
Note: If you want to go back to the previous display,  
press COMM.CANCEL/CONFIRM.  
Press ENTER.The LCDwill show the latest fax transaction.  
2
Tx001:ABC  
OK 10/12 10:26  
ꢁ
Press or until the transaction you want appears.  
3
Note: You can print a result of the fax transaction appears on the LCDby press-  
ingENTER.  
If you wish to exit this mode, press STOP.  
4
Printing all result of daily fax transactions:  
If you want to print all results of fax transactions, press Program key,E,1,0,4ENTER.  
Note: You can set your machine to print all results of faxing automatically.  
See Setting the Activity journal on pages 3.20 3.21 for more details.  
2.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Receiving faxes  
Answering calls manually  
In any reception mode, you can always answer calls manually if you have an optional  
handset installed. Just pick it up, as you would if using a normal phone.  
Reception modes  
Your fax machine has five different reception modes Tel Ready,Fax Ready,Fax/Tel  
Ready,Tel/Fax Ready and Ans/Fax Ready. Wellexplain each of these in this section.  
Tel Ready mode  
If you hear someone speaking to you, use your optional  
handset to speak back.  
Use it if:  
You want to use the same line for both fax and phone calls  
and  
On that line, you re using at least one other phone which is not  
connected to your fax machine  
or  
You have an optional handset installed on your fax machine  
If you hear fax tones ( beep beep beep ),  
press STARTand hang up the optional handset.  
The fax machine will begin receiving a fax.  
In this mode: Your fax machine never answers calls automatically.You must answer  
each call as described in Answering calls manually (this page, leftcol-  
umn).  
Fax Ready mode  
Use it if:  
Your fax machine uses its own phone line and doesn t share it with a  
phone or an answering machine.  
Answering fax calls using another phone, not the fax machine  
In this mode: Your fax machine answers each call and attemptstoreceive a fax.  
If you have one phone line ringing to several phones in your office and you have an  
optional handset attached to your fax,there s no need to run to the fax machine to  
answer every call. If you happen to answer a fax call while you re at another  
extension, put the handset down, but don t hang up. Walk to the fax machine and pick  
up the optional handset. Then press START.  
Fax/Tel Ready mode  
The Fax/Tel Ready mode is a combination of the Fax Ready and Tel Ready modes.  
Use it if:  
An optional handset is installed on your fax machine  
and  
After you press START, hang up both the fax machine s optional handset and the  
second telephone s handset. Because remote fax machines will wait several seconds to  
hear reception tones from your unit, you have about 30 seconds to walk to your fax,  
pick up the handset, and press START.  
You re using the machine as both a fax machine and a telephone  
In this mode: Your fax machine receives faxes silently but also alerts you when a reg-  
ular voice call comes in. (Your fax machine also beeps once at the end  
of each reception.)  
If a voice call comes in, your fax machine detects it and sounds a spe-  
cial ring. If you hear it, answer using your optional handset.  
While using an optional handset for your call, if you press COPYRESET,theLCDshows  
the current fax reception mode. Press COPYRESETagain to return to the TELmode.  
Note: This Fax/Tel Ready mode won t turn off ringers on other telephones in your  
house or office. Other phones won t distinguish between fax and voice calls.  
2.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Tel/Fax Ready mode  
The Tel/Fax Ready mode is a combination of the Tel Ready and Fax Ready modes.  
How to select the fax reception mode:  
Press Program key,I, and then press ENTERseven times.The LCDshows your  
current fax reception mode:  
1
Use it if:  
An optional handset is installed on your fax machine  
and  
Fax Ready  
You re using the machine as both a telephone and a fax machine  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
In this mode: Your fax machine rings the number of times you ve identified in the user  
settings (the default setting is two times). If you don t use the optional  
handset to answer the call, your fax machine answers the call. If a  
caller sends a fax, your machine begins receiving it. If a voice call  
comes in, your machine detectsitand sounds a special ring, telling you  
to answer using the optional handset.  
Press or until your desired reception mode is appeared.  
2
3
Fax/Tel Ready  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
Ans/Fax Ready mode  
Use it if:  
You re using an answering machine that s connected directly to your  
fax machine.  
Ifthepaper runs out while fax reception  
When your machine runs out of paper,itbeeps, the red light  
of the printer status lights glows and the LCDshows which source  
has run out of paper the 1st cassette, 2nd cassette (optional) or  
the bypass tray.  
In this mode: An answering machine connected to your fax machine answers each  
call. If a voice call comes in, the answering machine begins to record  
the incoming message. If your fax machine hears a fax tone, it begins  
receiving the fax message.  
Using an answering machine with your fax machine  
To connect your answering machine to your fax machine:  
In this example, the machine runs out of paper in 1st cassette:  
1st Cassette  
Please Supply Paper  
Set the fax machine for Ans/Fax Ready, asdescribed on right column.  
1
2
Helpful Tip: Iftheletter, legal or half-letter sized paper has been set in the bypass  
tray, your machine uses it when running out of paper in the paper  
cassette(s) during fax reception. Your machine s bypass tray can hold up  
to 50 sheetsofthe paper.  
Set your answering machine to answer calls afterno more than two rings.  
(See the answering machine sinstructions if necessary.)  
Create a new outgoing message on your answering machine.  
Here s a suggested message:  
3
Your fax machine cannot print fax messages without paper.But it can still receive docu-  
mentsintoits memory,asdescribed in the section below.  
Hello! You ve reached [your name or telephone number]. Toleave a voice  
message, please wait for the beep. To send a fax,press START on your fax  
machine. Thanks for calling!  
Out-of-paper reception  
If your machine runs out of paper,itstores up to 250 fax receptions inits memory.This  
is called out-of-paper reception. Once you refill the paper supply, the fax machine prints  
the stored messages automatically.  
Important: Your answering machine s outgoing message must be no longer  
than 10 seconds.  
Detection of silent fax machines  
Note: The number of pages(notreceptions) your fax machine can store for  
out-of-paper reception will vary. It depends on:  
Some older fax machines don t send fax tones when transmitting, which can cause  
problems when using an answering machine with your fax.  
Your machine s memory capacity  
But your fax machine can accommodate these silent machines without disrupting your  
answering machine operation.  
Types of documents being sent to your machine  
Resolution of documents being sent to your machine  
2.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Making copies  
Your machine s copier features  
Your machine has the following copier features:  
Single copy (see the right column on this page)  
Stacking multiple copies (see page 2.13)  
Place your original document in ADFface up, or on the FBSglass face downjust  
as you would to send a fax.  
2
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENTSIZE.  
3
4
As needed, set the following:  
Sorting multiple copies (see page 2.13)  
Select document type and adjust image contrast  
Enter the number of copies  
Enlarged or reduced copies (see page 2.13)  
Negative/positive copy (Reverse black and white areas) (see page 2.17)  
Combine copy (only for MFX-1700) (see page 2.17)  
Ultra copy mode (only for MFX-1700) (see page 2.18)  
Set copy reduction or enlargement ratio  
Note: For details about each item, see Making copy settings, pages  
2.15 2.16.  
Press START.  
5
Basic copy procedure  
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COPYRESET.  
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.  
Press COPY/FAX to change to  
1
Copy mode.  
COPY/FAX key  
Single copy  
Press COPY/FAX to change to Copy mode.  
1
2
Place your original document in ADFface up, or on the FBSglass face downjust  
as you would to send a fax.  
If you are using FBSglass, enter the document size by pressing the  
DOCUMENTSIZE.  
When the machine is in the Copy mode, the LCDshows:  
3
As needed, set the following:  
Number of copies  
4
Select document type and adjust image contrast  
Set copy reduction or enlargement ratio  
Copy reduction or enlargement ratio  
Recording paper size  
Document size  
Note: If you want to enlarge copy, use the FBSglass.  
Press START.  
5
Note: For details about each item, see Making copy settings, pages 2.15 2.16  
2.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Stacking multiple copies  
Press START.  
7
Press COPY/FAX to change to Copy mode.  
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.  
1
2
Press SORTto turn the sort setting of.f  
Note: The default setting of sorting is On.To change the default setting, see  
page 4.7.  
Enlarged orreduced copies  
Your fax machine is capable of enlargement and reduction when copying.  
Place your original document in ADFface up, or on the FBSglass face downjust  
as you would to send a fax.  
3
Note: The copy enlargement and reduction rate setting is available only for copying,  
not for faxing.  
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENTSIZE.  
4
5
6
Important: Copy enlargement is available only for copying using the FBS;itisnot  
available for copying using the ADF.  
Using the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want (up to 99).  
Press COPY/FAX to change to Copy mode.  
1
As needed, set the following:  
Place your original document in ADFface up, or on the FBSglass face downjust  
as you would send a fax.  
2
Select document type and adjust image contrast  
Set copy reduction or enlargement ratio  
Note: If you want to enlarged copy,use FBSglass.  
Note: For details about each items, see Making copy settings, pages  
2.15 2.16.  
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENTSIZE.  
3
4
Press START.  
Choose an enlargement or reduction ratio using or of the cursor key.  
7
You can reduce to 78%, 64 % or 50 % of the original size  
O R  
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.  
You can enlarge to 129% or 200 %  
O R  
Sorting multiple copies (using ADF)  
Note: You cannot use the FBSglass for sorting multiple copies.  
Press ZOOMto turn the ZOOMlight on, and adjust the ratio at 1% steps using or  
of the cursor key.You can enter the ratio between 50% and 200%.  
O R  
Directly enter any percentage between 50 % and 200 % by following procedure.  
1. Press #.  
2. Using the numeric key to enter your desired ratio (50 to 200).  
3. Press # again.  
Press COPY/FAX to change to Copy mode.  
1
2
Make sure the LEDon SORTglows, which means the sort setting is turned on.  
Note: If it does not glow, press SORTtoturniton.  
129%: Half-letter (5.5″ 8.5″)→ Letter (8.5″ 11″)  
78%: Legal (8.5″ 14″)→ Letter (8.5″ 11″)  
Place your original document in ADFface up, just as you would to send a fax.  
3
4
5
6
Set the document size by pressing the DOCUMENTSIZE.  
Helpful Tip: You can set the copy reduction or enlargement ratio to Auto . (See  
Setting copy auto, page 4.7.) If the Auto is set and you set the  
document size by pressing DOCUMENTSIZE, the machine automati-  
cally reduce or enlarge the original size (you entered) to fit on the  
paper size you selected.  
Using the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want (up to 99).  
As needed, set the following:  
Select document type and adjust image contrast  
Set copy reduction ratio  
Note: For details about each items, see Making the copy settings, page 2.15.  
2.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
As needed, set the following:  
If your recording paper on the bypass tray is Letter, Legal or Half-letter, proceed  
to step 6. Otherwise, skip to the step 7.  
5
5
6
Select document type and adjust image contrast  
Enter the number of copies  
Note: When you use transparency film, skip to step 8 and select OHP in step  
9.  
Press START.  
6
Press or until your desired recording paper size appears. Here, we ve cho-  
sen Legal:  
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COPYRESET.  
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.  
Set Bypass Ppr:Legl  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
Skip to step 9.  
Using the bypass tray  
When you need to use a size of paper not currently loaded in your machine spaper cas-  
sette(s), or when you want to use a special type of paper (such as transparency film),  
use the bypass tray.  
Press or until Other appears.  
7
8
Set Bypass Ppr:Other  
/ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
ꢁ
Important: If loading transparency (OHP) film into the bypass tray, be sure that the  
sheet is designed for laser printers and not for copiers. Also, be sure that  
the film does not have a paper backing and/or a leading strip. If it does,  
remove the paper backing and/or strip before inserting. Only film should  
go in, not film with any backing or strip.  
Then press orENTER.You will see:  
Set Bypass Ppr:Exe  
/ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
ꢀ
Either insert the document in the ADFor place it on the FBSglass.  
1
2
Press or until your desired recording paper size appears. Here, we ve cho-  
sen Postcard:  
Set the paper in the bypass tray.  
See the table of Acceptable paper size and cassette capacity on page 1.8 and  
Loading paper in bypass tray on page 1.10 for more information.  
Set Bypass Ppr:Post  
/ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
ꢀ
Note: Place the original document in the same orientation as the paper in the  
paper source.  
Press ENTER.  
9
10  
11  
If necessary, select desired resolution, contrast, reduction/enlargement ratio.  
Press STARTto begin the copying process.  
The machine will select the bypass tray for the paper  
source and the LCDwill show the default paper size you  
have set in step 6 on page 1.10.  
If you want to change it, proceed to step 4.  
Otherwise, skip to step 10.  
3
Copy Ready  
1
[ Ltr ] Ltr 100%  
Press BYPASSto change the paper size. The LCDwill show:  
4
Set Bypass Ppr:Ltr  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
2.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Memory overflow message  
If you ve stored too much information in your machine s memory, a Memory Overflow  
message may appear on the LCD:  
Making copy settings  
When the machine is in the Copy mode, the LCDshows:  
Number of copies  
Memory Overflow  
Start Or Cancel  
Copy reduction or enlargement ratio  
Recording paper size  
Document size  
This appears because (1) too many pages have been stored in the memory,or (2) the  
pages that are stored have too much information on them for your fax machine to  
remember.  
If this message appears, press STARTto tell your machine to copy as many pages in  
memory,orpress CANCELto delete from memory all pages stored during the current  
operation (but not previous operations).  
Note: If you don t operate your machine within 60 seconds, the machine will automati-  
cally print the document stored in the memory during the current operation.  
Number of pages  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number of copies for the document.  
Copy reduction or enlargement rate  
Your fax machine can make enlarged and reduced copies. For more information, see  
Enlarged or reduced copies, pages 2.13 2.14.  
Ifthepaper runs out while copying  
When your machine runs out of paper,itbeeps, the red light  
of the printer status lights glows and the LCDshows which source  
has run out of paper the 1st cassette, 2nd cassette (optional) or  
the bypass tray.  
Document size  
To select the document size manually,press DOCUMENTSIZE repeatedly until your desired  
document size appears. You can choose the Letter,Legal or Half letter:  
In this example, the machine runs out of the paper in the 1st cas-  
sette:  
1st Cassette  
Please Supply Paper  
If you want to cancel the current copying job, press STOP. Otherwise, supply the paper to  
displayed paper source to resume the copying.  
Note: When the document size is set to Auto (see Setting copy auto, page 4.7) you  
may see the LCDas below:  
Copy Ready  
1
[ Ltr ] Ltr 100%  
[
] means the machine automatically select the document size.  
Note: According to the magnification ratio or recording paper size, the document size  
will be not displayed:  
Copy Ready  
-----  
1
50%  
Ltr  
2.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Recording paper size  
Adjust image contrast  
As default, your machine selectsthe paper source automatically, however if you wish to  
select the paper source manually,press PAPERSIZE repeatedly until your desired paper  
size is displayed. The LCDtoggles the paper size in the 1st cassette, 2nd cassette (if  
installed), the bypass tray and Autoselect mode.  
Setting the contrast allows you to compensate for any excessive light or darkness, of  
the document pages you are copying.  
DARK  
To change the contrast setting, press CONTRASTrepeatedly.  
NORMAL  
A glowing LEDindicates the machine is using the setting named by  
thatLED.  
LIGHT  
Note: To avoid confusing the Light and Dark settings, just  
CONTRAST  
remember Light lightens and Dark darkens to  
keep it straight.  
Note: If the bypass tray has no paper,theLCDshows None for the paper size of the  
bypass tray.  
Note: When you choose the auto paper select mode, the LCD  
shows Auto and the all LED of the paper source will be  
lit.  
However,ifthebypass tray has no paper and the optional  
2nd paper cassette has not been installed,  
the machine will show the [(paper size)] instead  
of Auto although you select auto paper select mode.  
And it lights the LED of the paper source that can be used  
only.  
Select Document type  
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
Select this mode when copying photographs or draw-  
/TEXT  
ings.  
TEXT  
PHOTO/TEXT Select this mode when copying documents con-  
taining photographs or drawings with letters.  
DOCUMENT  
RESOLUTION  
TEXT Select this mode when copying letters.  
To select the document type, press DOCUMENTrepeatedly.  
A glowing LEDindicates the machine is using the setting named by that LED.  
2.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Combine (This mode is available only on the MFX-1700.)  
Special copy function  
This feature allows you to copy from four one-sided origi-  
nals to one sheet of paper.  
Negative/Positive (reversing black and white areas)  
If using this feature, the black and white areas of the original are reversed.  
Note: You cannot combine this feature with Reduced or Enlarged copies.  
Helpfultip: If you programmed a Softkey to turn on or off this feature, simply press-  
ing that key will turn on or offthis feature.  
Note: When using the Combine mode, the magnification  
ratio is automatically set to 50%. However, you  
can change it manually from 50 to 200 % if you  
want.  
Note: Although you can use Combine with the Ultra copy resolution, part of original  
image might be not copied. Ultra copy resolution only allows you to copy docu-  
ments at 100 %. Images cannot be enlarged or reduced.  
Make sure the machine is in the Copy mode.  
1
2
3
4
Place your original document in ADFface up, or on the FBSglass face down.  
Make sure the machine is in the Copy mode.  
1
2
3
4
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENTSIZE.  
Place your original document in ADFface up, or on the FBSglass face down.  
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS,ENTER.The LCDshows the current setting:  
Enter the document size by pressing the DOCUMENTSIZE.  
Nega/Posi  
:Off  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
Press COMBINE.The machine will return to the standby mode with following dis-  
play:  
Note: This feature is Off for default setting. However, you can turn it on for the  
default. (See page 4.7.)  
Copy <Combine>  
Ltr Auto  
1
50%  
Press or until the setting you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen On.  
5
6
Note: IfCOMBINEisnot assigned to a Soft Key,press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONStwice,  
ENTER.Then select On by using the cursor key and press ENTER.(See  
page 4.8 to change the default setting.)  
Nega/Posi  
:On  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
As needed, set the following:  
5
6
Press ENTERto save the setting. The machine returns to the standby mode with  
following display:  
Document type and Image contrast  
Number of copies  
Copy <Nega/Posi> 1  
Copy reduction or enlargement ratio (50 200%).  
Ltr  
Auto 100%  
Press START.  
As needed, set the following:  
7
8
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COPYRESET.  
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.  
Select document type and adjust image contrast  
Enter the number of copies  
Press START.  
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COPYRESET.  
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.  
2.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Ultra Copy resolution (This mode is available only on the MFX-1700.)  
Copyprotection  
W ith such a versatile copier built right into your fax machine, you might want to make  
sure it doesn t become too tempting to unauthorized copying that could deplete your  
machine s supplies more rapidly. So, to limit the use of your fax machine to only sending  
and receiving faxes in other words, to activate copy protection:  
Ultra copy offers the highest copy quality available. However, this feature also requires  
more memory than the normal copy resolution. If you try to copy many pages at a time,  
memory overflow may occur.  
Note: The enlargement/reduction copy feature is not available with this feature.  
Therefore, if you are using this feature with the Combine mode, part of original  
image might be not copied.  
Press Program key,B,3,0,5,ENTER.  
1
Copy Protect  
:Off  
Note: This feature allows you to copying with more high quality resolution.  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
Make sure the machine is in the Copy mode.  
1
2
3
4
Press or until the setting you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen On.  
2
3
Place your original document in ADFface up, or on the FBSglass face down.  
Copy Protect  
:On  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
Enter the document size by pressing DOCUMENTSIZE.  
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONSthree times,ENTER.The LCDshows the current setting:  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
Ultra Copy  
:Off  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
Copy Protect  
** Complete **  
Press or until the setting you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen On.  
5
6
Whenever someone tries to change the machine to Copy mode, the machine will sound  
a brief alarm tone and display:  
Ultra Copy  
:On  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
Fax Ready  
Copy Off  
Press ENTERto save the setting. The machine return to the standby mode with fol-  
lowing display:  
To turn copy protection to use the machine s copying function, repeat steps1-3, in step  
2, you press so that the display shows:  
Copy <Ultra Copy> 1  
Ltr  
Auto 100%  
Copy Protect  
:Off  
ꢃ/ꢂ/Enter  
As needed, set the following:  
Document type and Image contrast  
Number of copies  
7
8
Press START.  
Note: To reset the copy parameter to default setting, press COPYRESET.  
Note: To stop the copying, press STOP.  
2.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Using your fax machine as a phone  
Your fax machine can also be used as a phone, if you have an optional handset  
installed.The following is a brief look at the machine s telephone features.  
Important: Your machine s monitor speaker is not a speaker phone.Ifaperson  
answers the call, pick up the handset to speak.  
Note: Ifthecallfails, press MONITOR/CALLto hang up.  
Dialing a telephone number  
Redial  
Pick up the optional handset. You will hear a dial tone.  
1
2
Note: To use REDIAL/PAUSEkey, you should assign it to a Soft key in advance. (See  
page 3.16.)  
Dial the number by the using numeric keypad.  
or  
Lift the optional handset to get a dial tone.  
1
2
Press the one-touch key. (See One-touch phone dialing, on page 3.4.)  
or  
Press REDIAL/PAUSE.The LCDwill show:  
View Redial History  
0:1234567890  
Press SPEEDDIAL/TELINDEXonce, then press the three digit speed-dial number.  
(See Phoning via speed-dial, on page 3.6.)  
or  
Your machine can remember the latest 10 dial numbers. Press or untilthe  
dial number you want to redial appears.  
3
Press SPEEDDIAL/TELINDEXtwice, then search the name you want to call using the  
cursor key. (See Easy dial directory dialing, page 3.8.)  
Press START.  
4
When the other person answers, use the optional handset to speak to that per-  
son.  
When the other person answers, begin speaking.  
3
On-hook dialing  
Changing the dialing type  
If, with your machine set for pulse dialing, you must enter tones ( DTMF ) during a call,  
press DIALING OPTIONSonce (the ! symbol will be shown on the LCD).Your machine  
now will tone dial all subsequent numbers.  
Because your machine has a monitor speaker, you can dial without picking up the  
optional handset.  
Note: If you want to use MONITOR/CALLkey, you should assign it to a Softkey in  
advance. (See page 3.16.)  
For hands-free dialing:  
Note: To use DIALING OPTIONSkey, you should assign it to a Soft key in advance. (See  
page 3.16.)  
Press MONITOR/CALL.You ll hear a dial tone (unless you have set your speaker  
volume to Off; see page 1.8), and the LCDshows:  
Note: Using this key enables tone transmission from the numeric keypadafterthecall  
is connected. When you hang up the call, your machine will return to pulse  
dialing for the next call.  
1
** Tel Mode **  
_
Dial the number you want. Use either the numeric keypad, a one-touch key,a  
speed-dial number or telephone index to dial.  
2
2.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
Call request  
Plug the other end of the handset cord into the jack on the handset. If connected  
to a phone line, your fax machine is now off-hook.  
3
4
You can send or receive a fax message and have a regular phone conversation on the  
same call.  
Note: The handset has a small flash button which you can press while holding  
the handset, putting the fax machine back on-hook until you can hang  
up the handset properly in step 4.  
For more information on how to use this function, see page 3.24.  
Place the telephone handset onto the handset cradle. The cradle will press the  
handset s flash button, hanging up the handset.  
Dialing in the event of a power failure  
Your fax machine can only receive telephone calls even in the event of a power failure, if  
an optional handset is attached. But ti cannot send or receive a fax document.  
Attaching a second phone  
W ant to attach a second phone (even a cordless model!) to your fax machine, so they  
can share the same phone jack? No problem.  
Attaching an optional handset  
You may purchase an optional handset for your fax machine. Here is how to attach the  
handset.  
Before we go further,let s explain the idea. You re plugging the second phone s phone  
line into your machine sPHONE2 jack, not the wall phone jack. In such a setup, only your  
machine connectstothe wall. The second phone receives phone signals through your  
machine.  
Using a Phillips-head screwdriver,attach the handset cradle to the left  
side of your machine, using the screws included with the cradle.  
1
Now,lets proceed  
Plug one end of the handset cord (it scurled)into the PHONE1 jack on the rear  
side of your machine.  
2
If your second phone is already plugged into a wall phone jack, disconnect it from  
that jack. Hold onto the phone plug; you ll need it in step 2.  
1
Note: Of course, if your second phone is a model which requires AC power,as  
is true for the base of a cordless phone, don t unplug it from itsAC power  
jack!  
Using the plug mentioned in step 1, plug the phone cable from your second  
phone into the PHONE2 jack on the left side of your fax machine.  
2
LINE PHONE2 PHONE1  
2.20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operation  
This page intentionally blank.  
2.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Features  
This chapter describes  
convenient features of your machine.  
Autodialer ...........................................................3.1  
Broadcasting ........................................................3.9  
Delayed transmission .................................................3.10  
Batch transmission ...................................................3.11  
Polling ............................................................3.14  
Special features .....................................................3.16  
Security features ....................................................3.49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Autodialer  
Your fax machine sautodialer stores your most frequently called phone and fax num-  
bers for instant recall so you don t have to remember them. It s something like an  
electronic phone book.  
Special Dialing Characters  
Your fax machine allows you to enter special dialing characters when programming the  
autodialer.These characters include hyphens, which make phone numbers easier to  
read, and special characters needed for international calls.  
The chart below briefly describes each of these characters. It also tells you what keys to  
press on your fax machine to store those characters in your autodialer:  
Autodialer basics  
Note: To use DIALING OPTIONSkey, you should assign it to a Soft key in advance. (See  
page 3.16.)  
How do you autodial?  
There are two kinds of autodialer numbers. The difference between the two is how you  
dial them:  
Char. What it does  
Keystroke(s)  
Type  
How to dial  
Amount stored  
55  
Makes long numbers easier to read.  
Doesn t change fax machine operation.  
DIALING OPTIONS(once)  
DIALING OPTIONS(twice)  
DIALING OPTIONS(3 times)  
–
/
!
One-touch  
Press one of the keys, marked 01 55  
on the left side of the control panel  
(Has no effect in the United States.)  
Speed-dial  
Press SPEEDDIAL/TELINDEXfollowed by a  
three-digit identifier, from 001 to145  
145  
200  
Tells your fax machine to pause until it  
hears a dial tone.  
Total amount of numbers stored  
Location IDs and the EasyDial directory  
When you store numbers in your autodialer, you can give these numbers descriptive  
names, such as Chicago office or Billing department . Your machine calls this name a  
Location ID.  
Enters a pause. Each pause lasts two  
seconds (or whatever length you set; see  
page 4.5). Each pause uses two ofthe  
characters you can store in one phone  
number.  
REDIAL/PAUSE[after you enter  
at least one other character]  
–/  
–!  
Your machine sautodialer sorts these location IDs alphabetically. Using your EasyDial  
directory, you can look up these numbers by their descriptive names, just as if you were  
using a phone book.  
If your fax machine is on a pulse (not  
tone-dialing) line, switches from pulse-  
dialing to tone ( DTMF )-dialing. Use after  
the actual phone number but before any  
characters (such as a long-distance  
carrier s access code) which must be in  
DTMFtone. Do not use on a tone line.  
DIALING OPTIONS(4 times)  
W e ll explain how to store the numbers and location IDs in the next few pages.  
The EasyDial directory is discussed in detail on page 3.8.  
Call groups  
As you set up your autodialer, you may also want to set up call groups. These are setsof  
phone numbers that make it easy to send the same fax to many different locations. For  
example, one call group may include all of your clientsinone city, another group may  
include all of your employees and another may include all your vendors.  
Your fax machine can store as many as 200 numbers in up to 32 call groups.  
See also Call group dialing, page 3.7.  
3.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Ifyoudo want to enter or change this Location ID, go on to step 7.  
Ifyoudo not want to enter or change this Location ID, skip to step 8.  
Using one-touch keys  
Your fax machine stores up to 55 one-touch numbers using the keys marked 01 55.  
Enter the Location ID by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review Entering  
characters , page 1.12.) A numbersLocation ID may be up to 24 characters in  
length.  
7
Entering or changing a one-touch number  
Press Program key,A,1,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows the empty one-touch num-  
ber.  
Press ENTERto save the setting and continue.  
1
8
9
The LCDnow displays:  
Select One-Touch  
01:No Number Stored  
02:Group No.  
_
02:Group No.  
2,6_  
or  
Note: If a one-touch number other than 01 appears on the LCD, it means that  
you have already entered a number for 01.  
You may now assign this number to up to 32 call groups. (If necessary, review  
Call groups,left column.)  
Press the one-touch key in which you want to store a number or change a  
previously stored number. Here, we ve selected 02 and the LCDshows either:  
2
Ifyoudo want to enter or change the call group number, go on to step 10.  
Ifyoudo not want to enter or change this number s call group, go to step 11.  
Select One-Touch  
02:No Number Stored  
Select One-Touch  
02:9-1-555-987-6543  
or  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the call groups for this number.There are 32  
possible call groups, numbered 1 32.  
10  
Note: If you want to select a different one-touch key, press that key now.  
Here, we ve entered 3 to assign this one-touch number to Call Group 3:  
Press ENTER.Depending on whether you already have a number entered for this  
one-touch number,theLCDnow shows either:  
3
4
02:Group No.  
3_  
02:Fax Number  
_
02:Fax Number  
9-1-555-987-6543_  
or  
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a  
commaafter each number (except the last one) by pressing GROUP.  
For example, if you enter 3,GROUP,1,6,GROUP,2,7 to assign this one-touch  
number to Call Groups3,16and 27, the LCDshows:  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should dial  
it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires. (You may want  
to review Special dialing characters, page 3.1.) The number can be up to 40  
characters in length:  
02:Group No.  
3,16,27_  
02:Fax Number  
9-/1-5559292039_  
Helpfultip: To assign this number to all 32 call groups,enter 0 (zero).  
Press ENTER.  
Your LCDcan show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond those  
20, press toscroll to the leftor to scroll to the right.  
11  
The LCDwill display the next empty one-touch number.  
If you want to enter this one-touch number, go back to step 3.  
Ifyoudo not want to enter any more one-touch numbers, press STOPtofinish.  
Ifyoudo not want to enter the currently displayed one-touch number but do want  
to enter another one-touch number,goback to step 2.  
When the number is as you want it, press ENTERtostoreit.  
5
6
The LCDnow shows:  
02:Name  
_
;Upper  
02:Name  
S. W. Region Office_  
;Lower  
Use the autodialer labels in your fax spackaging to write down the stored numbers for  
easy reference.  
or  
The machine is now prompting you for a name a Location ID  
able to find it in the EasyDial directory (see page 3.8).  
so you ll be  
3.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Erasing a one-touch number  
One-touch fax dialing  
Todiala fax call using a one-touch number:  
Press Program key,A,1,0,2,ENTER.The LCDshows the one-touch number you  
have already entered:  
1
Place the the document in the ADF,or on the FBSglass.  
1
2
Select One-Touch  
01:9-1-555-345-6789  
If you are using the FBSglass, enter the document size by pressing the  
DOCUMENTSIZE.  
Note: If the one-touch number that appears is other than 01, itmeans that 01 is  
empty.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
3
4
Press the one-touch key in which you ve stored the number.  
Press the key for the one-touch number you want to erase.  
Here, we ve selected 02:  
2
What happens next depends on whether you specified memory transmission or  
real time transmission:  
Select One-Touch  
02:9-1-555-987-6543  
If you specified Quick Memory transmission:  
If you want to erase a number stored in a different one-touch key than what  
appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
Your fax machine scans the first page of your document into memory,then dials the  
other fax machine.  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
While dialing, your machine scans the other documents into memory.  
4
The LCDshows the Location ID and the document swidthand resolution settings:  
02:Erase One-Touch  
Check Enter/Cancel  
Plano Office  
A4 Normal  
Important: If you want to quit without erasing the one-touch number you ve  
selected, press CANCEL.The fax will return to step 2.  
Note: Ifthe entry doesn t have a Location ID,the number appears.  
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the scanned document directly  
from memory.(To review Quick memory transmission, see page 2.3.)  
Press ENTERto erase the number.  
5
Erase One-Touch  
** Complete **  
If you specified normal memory transmission:  
To erase another one-touch number, repeat steps 2 5. Or press STOPto return to  
standby mode.  
Your fax machine scans your entire document into memory first, then dials the other  
fax machine.  
The LCDshows the Location ID and the document swidthand resolution settings:  
Printing a list of one-touch numbers  
Forgot which number is stored in which one-touch key? Just print a list of your one-  
touch numbers. The list includes each key s number,the Location ID (ifany),  
fax/telephone number and group number(s) you ve stored in the key.  
Plano Office  
A4 Normal  
Note: If the entry doesn t have a Location ID, the number appears.  
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the document directly from mem-  
ory.(To review Memory transmission, see page 2.3.)  
To print a list of one-touch numbers, press Program key,E,1,0,6,ENTER.  
3.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
If you specified real time transmission:  
Using speed-dial numbers  
Your fax machine will store up to 145 speed-dial numbers, designated by three-digit  
identifier codes from 001 through 145.  
Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.  
The LCDshows the Location ID and the document swidthand resolution settings:  
Plano Office  
A4 Normal  
Entering or changing a speed-dial number  
Press Program key,A,2,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows an empty speed-dial num-  
ber:  
1
Note: If the entry doesn t have a Location ID,the number appears.  
When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its scanner,  
transmitting as it goes. (To review Real time transmission, see page 2.3.)  
Enter Speed-Dial No.  
001:No Number Stored  
Note: If a speed-dial number other than 001 appears on the LCD, it means you  
have already entered a number for 001.  
One-touch phone dialing  
Todiala phonecall using a one-touch number,you musthave an optional handset  
attached to your machine. (Contact your authorized Muratec dealer to order an optional  
handset.)  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired speed-dial number sthree-digit iden-  
tifier code. Here, we ve entered 005 and the LCDshows either:  
2
Enter Speed-Dial No. Enter Speed-Dial No.  
005:No Number Stored or 005:9-555-397-0123  
To make the call:  
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:  
1
Important: When entering the identifier code for speed-dial numbers less than  
100, you must enter leading zeros to make three digits.  
For example, 001-099.  
Lift the handset  
Press MONITOR/CALLto use the monitor speaker  
Press the one-touch key in which you ve stored the number.As the machine  
dials, it shows the number on the LCD:  
If you want to select a different speed-dial number, press that number sthree-  
digit identifier code now.That number appears on the LCD.  
2
3
** Tel Mode **  
9-555-2842_  
Press ENTER.Depending on whether you already have a number entered for this  
speed-dial number,theLCDnow shows either:  
4
005:Fax Number  
_
005:Fax Number  
9-555-397-0123_  
Note: Remember that your fax machine s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone. fI  
you dialed by using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to the  
person that answers.  
or  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should dial  
it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires. (You may want  
to review Special dialing characters, page 3.1.)  
5
6
Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALLto dial, press MONITOR/CALLto hang  
up.  
The number can be up to 40 characters in length:  
005:Fax Number  
9-1-555-567-1234_  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press toscroll to the leftor to scroll to the right.  
When the number appears as you want it, press ENTERtostoreit.  
3.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
The LCDnow shows:  
Press ENTER.  
7
8
12  
The LCDwill display the next empty speed-dial number.  
If you want to enter this speed-dial number, go back to step 4.  
Ifyoudo not want to enter any more speed-dial numbers, press STOPtofinish.  
Ifyoudo not want to enter the currently displayed speed-dial number but do want  
to enter another speed-dial number, goback to step 2.  
005:Name ;Upper  
_
005:Name ;Lower  
West Coast Sales_  
or  
The machine is now prompting you for a name a Location ID  
able to find it in the EasyDial directory (see page 3.8).  
so you ll be  
Ifyoudo want to enter or change this number s Location ID, go on to step 8.  
Ifyoudont want to enter or change this number s Location ID, skip to step 9.  
Erasing a speed-dial number  
Press Program key,A,2,0,2,ENTER.The LCDshows the speed-dial number you  
have already entered:  
Enter the Location ID by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review Entering  
characters , page 1.12) A numbersLocation ID may be up to 24 characters in  
length.  
1
Enter Speed-Dial No.  
001:9-555-584-6950  
Press ENTERto save the setting and continue.  
9
10  
Note: If the speed-dial number that appears is other than 001, it means that  
001 is empty.  
The LCDnow shows:  
005:Group No.  
_
005:Group No.  
1,4,12_  
or  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial num-  
ber you want to erase. Here, we ve selected 005:  
2
You may now assign this number to up to 32 call groups. (If necessary, review  
Call groups, page 3.7.)  
Enter Speed-Dial No.  
005:9-1-555-987-6543  
Ifyoudo want to enter or change the call group number, go on to step 11.  
Ifyoudo not want to enter or change this number scall group, skip to step 12.  
If you want to erase a different speed-dial number than the one that appears on  
the LCD, enter that number now.  
3
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the call groups for this number.There are 32  
possible call groups, numbered 1 32.  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
11  
4
005:Erase Speed-Dial  
Check Enter/Cancel  
Here, we ve entered 6 to assign this speed-dial number to Call Group 6:  
005:Group No.  
6_  
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the speed-dial number you ve selected,  
press CANCEL.The fax will return to step 2.  
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a comma  
after each number (except the last one) by pressing GROUP.  
Here, we ve entered 6,GROUP,1,7,GROUP,3,0 to assign this speed-dial number  
toCall Groups6,17and 30:  
Press ENTERto erase the number.  
5
Erase Speed-Dial  
** Complete **  
To erase another speed-dial number, repeat steps 2 5. Or press STOPto return to  
standby mode.  
005:Group No.  
6,17,30_  
Helpfultip: To assign this number to all 32 call groups,enter 0 (zero).  
Printing a list of speed-dial numbers  
You can easily print a list of your speed-dial numbers. The list includes each number s  
three-digit identifier, the Location ID (if any), number and any group numbers you ve  
stored for that speed-dial number.  
To print a list of speed-dial numbers, press Program key,E,1,0,7,ENTER.  
3.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
The LCDshows the Location ID and the document swidthand resolution settings:  
Fax dialing via speed-dial  
Todiala fax call using a speed-dial number:  
Plano Office  
A4 Normal  
Place the document in the ADF,or on the FBSglass.  
1
2
Note: If the speed-dial entry doesn t have a Location ID,the number appears.  
When the other machine answers, your fax will transmit the document directly from  
memory.(To review Memory transmission, see page 2.3.)  
If you are using the FBSglass, enter the document size by pressing the  
DOCUMENTSIZE.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
3
4
If you specified real time transmission:  
Press SPEEDDIAL/TELINDEX.The LCDshows:  
Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.  
The LCDshows the Location ID and the document swidthand resolution settings:  
Enter Speed-Dial No.  
S_  
Plano Office  
A4 Normal  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the three-digit identifier (such as 018, inthis  
example) for the speed-dial number you want to dial. The LCDshows the Location  
ID (or fax number) you stored:  
5
Note: If the speed-dial number doesn t have a Location ID,the number appears.  
When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its scanner,  
transmitting as it goes. (To review the Real time transmission, see page 2.3)  
Plano Office  
S018_  
Phoningvia speed-dial  
Todiala phone call using a speed-dial number,you musthave an optional handset  
attached to your machine. To make the call:  
Press START.  
6
What happens next depends on whether you specified memory transmission or real  
time transmission:  
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:  
1
Lift the handset  
If you specified quick memory transmission:  
Press MONITOR/CALLto use the monitor speaker  
Your fax machine scans the first page of your document into memory,then dials the  
other fax machine.  
Press SPEEDDIAL/TELINDEX.The LCDshows:  
2
** Tel Mode **  
S_  
While dialing, your machine scans the other documents into memory.  
The LCDshows the Location ID and the document swidthand resolution settings:  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial num-  
ber you want to dial. As the machine dials, it shows the number on the LCD:  
Plano Office  
A4 Normal  
3
** Tel Mode **  
9-555-5783_  
Note: If the entry doesn t have a Location ID,the number appears.  
When the other machine answers, your fax transmits the scanned document directly  
from memory.(To review Quick memory transmission, see page 2.3.)  
Note: Remember that your fax machine s monitor speaker is not a speakerphone. fI  
you dialed using the monitor speaker, pick up the handset to speak to the per-  
son that answers!  
If you specified normal memory transmission:  
Your fax machine scans your entire document into memory, then dials the other fax  
machine.  
Note: If the call fails, and you used MONITOR/CALLto dial, press MONITOR/CALLto hang  
up.  
3.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
For example, the directory might show:  
Call group dialing  
If you frequently send the same fax message to more than one location, store the group  
number into the one-touch key or speed-dial number. (Ifnecessary, see Using a one-  
touch keys and Using speed-dial numbers , in previous page.)  
No. Location  
00  
10  
20  
30  
2
[01]Carson Co  
[02]Tex. Ofc. 1  
[03]e.e.gummi  
S001And Sew I 2 4  
S002KC Enterp  
4
0
4
After you store the group number, you can send the same fax to many different loca-  
tions using GROUPkey.  
0
7 0  
1
S003Katz Cat 12345678901234567890123456789012  
Send a fax via call group  
Note: The call group dialing can be used only with memory transmission.  
In this list, one-touch number 01 ([01]) is in groups 4, 10 and 14; one-touch number 02  
([02]) is in group 1; one-touch number 03 ([03]) is in groups 20 and 32; speed-dial num-  
ber 001 (S001) isincall groups 2 and 4; speed-dial number 002 (S002) isingroups7,  
10 and 21; and speed-dial number 003 (S003) isinall groups, 1 to 32.  
Place the document in the ADF,or on the FBSglass. And adjust resolution and  
contrast if necessary.  
1
If you are using the FBSglass, enter the document size by pressing the  
DOCUMENTSIZE.  
2
To print a call group directory, press Program key,E,1,0,9,ENTER.  
Press GROUP.  
3
Enter Group No.  
G
Use the numeric keypad to enter the group number you want to send a fax.  
4
Note: If you want to send a fax to several groups at a time, press BROADCAST  
then repeat steps23. Also, you can include the one-touch location,  
speed-dial location and up to 30 manually dialed number. (See  
Broadcasting, page 3.9.)  
Press START.  
5
Printing a call group directory  
Your machine can also print a call group directory.Thislists all your stored autodialer num-  
bers by Location ID andlists the groups to which these numbers belong.  
The directory divides the call groups into four banks, 01 09 (the list shows 00), 10 19 (the  
list shows 10), 20 29 (the list shows 20) and 30 32 (the list shows 30). Ifyou specify call  
group 0 (which puts the number in all call groups), the directory shows all numbers (see  
right column).  
3.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
If an EasyDial call fails  
If an EasyDial call fails, what happens next depends upon the kind of call it was.  
EasyDial directory dialing  
EasyDial directory dialing makes your autodialer even more like an electronic phone  
book. EasyDial sorts and displays numbers alphabetically according to their Location  
IDs, so you can find them and dial them easily.  
If it was a fax call  
Your fax machine automatically redials the number according to the redial interval  
you ve set. It keeps trying until either of the following occurs:  
To dial using EasyDial:  
It successfully reaches the other number  
For a regular phone call: Pick up the optional handset.  
1
It has attempted the number of redials programmed and has still not connected (see  
Changing redial settings, page 4.5).  
Note: To make a regular phone call from your machine, you must have an  
optional handset attached.  
If it was a regular phone call  
You ll have to redial manually:  
For a fax call: Place the document in ADF, or on the FBSglass. And adjust resolu-  
tion and contrast if necessary.  
Press SPEEDDIAL/TELINDEXtwice. The LCDshows the firstlisting in your fax  
machine s EasyDial directory:  
Lifting the optional handset.  
2
1
2
Press REDIAL/PAUSE.The LCDwill show:  
Telephone Index [A]  
ABC Company  
:[01]  
View Redial History  
0:1234567890  
The EasyDial directory sorts entries alphabetically in the following order:  
(1) by alphabet, (2) by number and (3) by symbol.  
Note: To use REDIAL/PAUSEkey, you should assign it to a Soft key in advance.  
(See page 3.16.)  
If the listing that appears is the one you want to dial, skip to step 4.  
Otherwise, proceed to next step.  
Your machine can remember the last 10 dial numbers you ve dialed.  
Press or until the dial number you want to redial appears.  
3
Scroll through the listings to find the one you want. You do this by pressing the  
following cursor key:  
3
4
Press START.  
4
or to select the character set alphabet, number or symbol for the  
first character of the Location ID.  
or to check different listings within that character set.  
Note: The scrolling is open-ended. For example, when you run out of  
listings beginning with alphabet  
A
, pressing or automatically  
moves you into listings beginning with other characters.  
When the LCDdisplays the name you want to dial, press START.  
If you ve set the document in the ADF, your machine will start the fax transmis-  
sion.  
If you ve set the document on the FBSglass, enter you document size by  
pressing DOCUMENTSIZE,then press START.Your machine will start the fax  
transmission.  
If you make a regular phone call, speak after a person answered.  
3.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Broadcasting  
The fastest way to fax one document to manyrecipientsistobroadcast it.  
Delayed broadcasting  
What if you want the broadcast to take place later? That s the purpose of setting up a  
delayed broadcast.  
In an ordinary broadcast, you send the fax as you normally would, except you just add  
more fax numbers. You can enter up to 230 numbers:  
30 manually-dialed numbers AND  
Note: Delayed commands are discussed on pages 2.7 and 2.8. And you may want to  
read Delayed transmission on page 3.10 before proceeding.  
200 autodialer numbers O R 1 call group with all 200 autodialer numbers  
You can broadcast using any function that requires a fax number to be entered.  
That means you can send a delayed broadcast, program a polling broadcast and even  
broadcast to hub units for F-Code relay broadcast initiation.All of these are explained  
in this chapter.  
Follow steps 1 4 of Broadcasting basics (left column).  
1
2
3
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS,ENTER.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and time (in 24-hour for-  
mat) when you want the broadcast to occur.  
Here, we ve scheduled it for 10:15 PMon the 30th.  
To send a broadcast fax:  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments as you would for a  
regular fax transmission.  
1
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/22:15  
Press BROADCAST.  
2
3
Enter the first fax number, as usual. Use either a one-touch number, a speed-dial  
number,acall group or a regular number dialed from the numeric keypad.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
4
5
Press START.Your machine will scan your document into the memory and return  
tostandby mode, while showing this on the LCD:  
To add more fax numbers, press BROADCASTbetween each one to insert acomma.  
Then enter the number as described in step 3 (pressing GROUPinsertsits own comma).  
You can send to up to 230 numbers for a broadcast.  
4
** Reserved **  
Jun 06 2002 17:17  
Press Start  
[03],S098,G12,9-555_  
This means your fax machine is reserved for the delayed broadcast you  
just programmed, but it can still be used to send and receive faxes if your broad-  
cast document is stored in memory.  
Important: Do not insert a comma afterthe last fax number.  
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, press CANCELto erase them.  
Press START.Your fax machine scans the document into memory and then sends  
it to each number or call group you ve entered.  
5
Making changes to broadcasts  
If you need to make changes in a broadcast after setting it up, use the Review com-  
mandsfunction.See Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast, page 2.8.  
3.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Delayed transmission  
Take advantage of lower evening and weekend long-distance rates with delayed trans-  
mission. Your fax machine can store up to 99 delayed commands, each of which you  
can program up to 31 days in advance.  
When the date and time are entered, press ENTERto save the delayed transmis-  
sion. The LCDshows:  
5
Enter Fax Number  
_
Important: If you program all 99 delayed transmission commands, no further mem-  
ory transmission is possible until one or more of the commands is  
completed. (To review Memory transmission, see page 2.3.) However,if  
all 99 delayed commands are programmed, you can always transmit with  
the Real time transmission from ADF(see page 2.3).  
Enter the fax number for the delayed transmission document. You can either  
press a one-touch key, enter a speed-dial number or use the numeric keypadto  
enter the fax number.  
6
7
Press START.Your machine returns to standby mode, while showing this on the  
LCD:  
Setting up a delayed transmission  
Important: Your machine only remembers the day ofthe month that it s supposed to  
send a delayed transmission. It does not remember the month itself.Soif  
you want to send a transmission at 5:05 PMon June26, don t program the  
transmission sooner than 5:06 PMon May 26.  
** Reserved **  
Jun 06 2002 17:17  
This means your fax machine is reserved for the delayed transmission you just  
programmed.  
To set up a delayed transmission:  
If you set the machine for memory transmission,itwill scan the document into  
memory,after which you can use the machine normally.  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.  
1
2
If you set the machine for non-memory transmission (real time transmission),  
the machine can receive faxes but can t transmit until your delayed command  
has been performed.  
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS.The LCDshows:  
1.Delayed  
Important: If you specified the delayed non-memory transmission (real time  
transmission), do not remove the document in ADF. If the docu-  
ment is removed from ADFbefore a delayed command completes,  
it cancels the delayed real time transmission.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows the current day of the month, followed by the current  
time (in 24-hour format):  
3
Delayed  
Enter Time: 06/17:16  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and the time when you  
want the fax to send the delayed transmission.  
4
Note: Press to move the cursor left,or to move it right.  
Here, we ve set the transmission to occur on the 11th at 11:05 PM:  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 11/23:05  
3.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Batch transmission  
Batch transmission allows you to store multiple documents in an electronic basket  
throughout the day and then fax that entire basket to one location.  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press toscroll to the leftor to scroll to the right.  
To do this, just tell the machine when and where the transmission should go. When that  
date and time arrives, your machine will transmit each document in the batch box to the  
remote fax machine. You can store up to 40 documents (each document can include  
one page or many pages) into your machine sfive electronic batch boxes.  
When the number appears as you want it, press ENTER.The LCDnow shows:  
6
7
3:Transmit Time  
Enter Time: 26/14:00  
Instruct your fax to send from this batch box in one of the following ways:  
Option 1:  
Option 2:  
Onceatacertain time on a certain day of the month (For example:  
Do this at 5:05 PMon the 30th. ) Use the numeric keypadto  
enter the date and time (24-hour format) the machine should send  
the documents from the batch box:  
Creating or modifying a batch box  
Before sending a batch transmission, you have to create batch boxes in your fax  
machine. The steps below also let you modify existing batch boxes.  
To create or modify a batch box:  
3:Transmit Time  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
Press Program key,C,5,0,1,ENTER.Depending on whether you already have a  
number entered for batch box 1, the LCDshows:  
1
Atacertain time each day you press the key (For example: Do  
thisat5:05 PMtoday. ) Use the numeric keypadtoenter 0,0(00),  
and then the time when the fax should send the documents from the  
batch box:  
Select Batch Box  
1:No Number Stored  
Select Batch Box  
1:9-1-555-345-6789  
or  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1 5) of the batch box you want to  
create or modify. Here, we ve pressed 3 and see either:  
2
3:Transmit Time  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
Select Batch Box  
3:No Number Stored  
Select Batch Box  
3:9-555-2110  
or  
Note: Tochange a digit in the date or the time, press to move the cursor left  
or to move it right. Then enter the correct number.  
If you want to select a different batch box than the one displayed on the LCD, use  
the numeric keypad to enter the batch box number now.  
3
4
When the date and time are set, press ENTER.  
8
9
Press ENTER.The LCDnow shows either:  
The LCDnow shows:  
3:Fax Number  
_
3:Fax Number  
9-555-2110_  
3:Name  
_
;Upper  
3:Name  
;Lower  
or  
or  
Bookkeeping_  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number exactly as your machine should  
dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system requires. (You may  
want to review Special dialing characters, page 3.1.) The number can be up to  
40 characters in length:  
The machine now asks you to name this batch box.  
5
Ifyoudo not want to enter or change this batch box s name, skip to step 11.  
Enter the name by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review Entering  
characters , page 1.12) A batch box s name may be up to 24 characters in length.  
10  
11  
3:Fax Number  
9-1-555-871-9052_  
Press ENTERto save the batch box information.  
3.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
To create or modify another batch box, repeat steps 2 11.  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
4
5
To finish, press stop.  
Press Start  
Box :5 File : 1  
Printing a list of batch boxes  
You can easily print a list of your batch boxes. The list includes each box sidentifier num-  
ber, the Location ID, fax number and date/time the transmission should start.  
Important: Your machine gives each document in a batch box a file number,  
shown as 1above. You will need to know this file number should  
you later wish to erase or print the stored document. Each batch  
box holds up to 40 files (1-40).  
To print the list, press Program key,E,1,1,5,ENTER.  
Press START.The machine displays Reserved on the top line of the LCD.  
This means the document is stored in memory.  
Storing a document for batch transmission  
Your fax machine can store up to 40 documents(each document can include one page  
or many pages) in each batch box until the date and time you designate the batch trans-  
mission to take place. Once the batch documents are transmitted, they are  
automatically erased from the machine s memory.  
Printing a list of stored batch documents  
You can print a list of the documents stored in your machine s batch boxes. This list pro-  
vides you with the documents file numbers so you can erase or print them as needed.  
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
The batch box must exist on your fax machine.  
To print the list, press Program key,E,1,1,6,ENTER.  
You must know the batch box s one-digit number (1 5).  
Printing a document stored in a batch box  
To store a document in a batch box for batch transmission:  
To print a document stored in a batch box:  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.  
1
2
Press Program key,D,3,0,3,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONSfive times and then press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
Batch Document  
Enter Box No.  
:_  
Batch Tx  
Enter Box No.  
:_  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1 5) of the batch box storing the  
document you want to print. Here, we ve entered 1 to indicate batch box 1.  
2
3
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit number for the batch box you want  
to use. Here, we ve entered 5 to indicate batch box 5.  
3
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
Batch Tx  
Enter Box No.  
1:Batch Document  
Enter File No. :_  
:5  
Note: Tx is a common abbreviation for transmission.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the document s file number (1 40).  
Press ENTER.  
4
5
Your fax machine prints the document, then returns to standby mode.  
3.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Erasing a document stored in a batch box  
Erasing an empty batch box  
To erase a document stored in a batch box on your fax machine:  
Batch boxes must be empty to be erased. If a box has documentsstored in it, then you  
first have to erase those documents. See left column.  
Press Program key,D,2,0,3,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
To erase an empty batch box:  
Batch Document  
Press Program key,C,5,0,2,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
Enter Box No.  
:_  
1
Select Batch Box  
1:No Number Stored  
Select Batch Box  
1:9-5551023  
or  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1 5) of the batch box storing the  
document you want to erase. Here, we ve entered 1to indicate batch box 1.  
2
3
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1 5) of the batch box you want to  
erase. Here, we ve pressed 2 and see:  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
2
1:Batch Document  
Enter File No. :_  
Select Batch Box  
2:9-1-972-5559900  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the document s file number (1 40).  
4
5
If you want to erase a different batch box than what appears on the LCD, enter  
that batch box s number now.  
3
4
Press ENTER.The fax machine now gives you one last chance to change your  
mind before erasing the document.  
Press ENTER.If the batch box is empty,theLCDshows:  
1:Batch Document  
2:Erase Batch Box  
Check Enter/Cancel  
Check  
Enter/Stop  
Important: To quit the operation without erasing this or any document, press  
STOP.The machine returns to standby mode.  
Important: If you select a batch box which is not empty, the machine beeps  
and briefly shows:  
Press ENTER.The fax machine erases the document you ve chosen, then returns  
tostandby mode.  
Select Batch Box  
Document Stored  
6
Erase any documentsstored in the batch box (see left column),  
then go back to step 3.  
Important: If you want to quit without erasing the batch box you ve selected,  
press CANCEL.The fax will return to step 2.  
Important: If you want to quit without erasing any batch box, press STOP.The  
machine returns to standby mode.  
Press ENTERto erase the batch box.  
5
Erase Batch Box  
** Complete **  
To erase another batch box, repeat steps25. Tofinish, press STOP.  
3.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Polling  
Polling allows someone to fax a document to you without having to make the call or pay  
forit.There are several kinds of polling:  
When your machine polls for documents, it dials the number and, upon making contact  
with the other machine, begins receiving the document as if the other machine had  
placed the call.  
Regular polling Your fax retrieves a document from a remote fax machine.  
F-Code polling Your fax retrieves a document stored as a file in the remote fax  
machine. To do this, you must be communicating with another F-code-compatible fax  
machine. For more information on F-Code polling, see F-Code transmission and  
polling, pages 3.33.  
Being polled  
Not only can you poll, but you can also be polled. To set up a document for regular  
polling:  
Note: For polling to work, the remote machine must also be set up to be polled.  
If your fax machine is set for Tel Ready reception, change it to the reception  
mode except the Tel Ready.  
1
Regular polling  
Important: Your machine cant bepolledifitsinTel Ready mode.  
To set up your machine for regular polling:  
Insert the document.  
2
3
Make sure the document is inserted in the remote fax machine.  
1
2
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.(Your fax machine will be transmitting  
to the machine doing the polling.)  
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONStwice and then press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
Press Program key,D,1,0,1,ENTER.  
Your fax will scan the document into memory and return to standby mode.  
Enter Fax Number  
_
4
Once the remote fax machine polls the document you stored, your fax machine auto-  
matically erases the document from memory.  
Enter the remote fax machine s number by either pressing a one-touch key,  
entering a speed-dial number or using the numeric keypad.  
3
To perform the regular polling now,skip to step 8.  
To perform delayed regular polling, go on to step 5.  
Printing a stored polling document  
To print a document you ve stored for regular polling without erasing it,  
press Program key,D,3,0,1,ENTER.  
4
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
5
Delayed  
Enter Time: 15/17:05  
Erasing a stored polling document  
To erase a document you ve stored for regular polling from your machine s memory,  
press Program key,D,2,0,1,ENTER.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the date and time (use the 24-hour format)  
when your machine should perform the delayed regular polling.  
6
Press ENTER.  
7
8
Press START.  
3.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Limiting polling access to your fax machine  
When you set the passcode, a calling fax which doesn t present the proper passcode  
cannot poll from your fax.  
Important: The passcodeyou use for polling operation isnot the same as the protec-  
tion passcode (see page 3.49).  
Note: If you re using the Block Junk Fax feature (see pages 3.53 3.54), even incom-  
ing calls which meet the passcode test must come from phone numbers you ve  
approved.  
To set your fax machine spasscode:  
Decide on the four-digit passcode (0001 9999)you want to use. W rite it down,  
and put it in a safe place.  
1
Press Program key,B,2,1,3,ENTER.The LCDshows the current code:  
2
Passcode  
Passcode  
:0000  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the desired four-digit passcode.  
3
Passcode  
Passcode  
:5627  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
4
Note: To turn off the limiting polling, change the passcode to 0000byrepeating steps  
1 4 and entering 0000instep 3.  
3.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Special features  
Your fax machine has numerous special features to make your communication easier.  
W e ll cover them here.  
Setting the Soft Key  
Press Program key,B,1,0,3,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Select Soft Key No.  
1:Energy Saving  
Soft Keys  
Soft Keys are shortcut keys. You can program the soft keys on the control panel to turn  
on or off any function with just the touch of a button. Your machine has three SoftKeys.  
If the light above any one of these keys glows, that means the setting  
programmed into that key is active.  
. . . or indicates another function you ve stored into this key.  
Press or until the Soft Key (1-3) you want to change appears. In this exam-  
ple, we ve chosen 3.  
2
3
These keys are programmed at the factory to turn the following functions on or of:f  
Soft Key 1:Energy saving (see page 4.10)  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
3:Combine  
Note: If the optional printer controller has been installed to your machine,  
this key will be ONLINEkey.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Soft Key 2:Sort copy (see pages 2.13 and 4.7)  
SoftKey3:Combine (see page 2.17)  
Press or until the function appears that you want to program into the key.In  
this example, we ve chosen Cover page.  
4
5
Note: If your machine is MFX-1300, this key is Fax&Copy.  
3:Cover Page  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
But instead of using the Soft Keys to control the functions above, you can program them  
to turn other functions on or off.These functions are:  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
The LCDwill display the next Soft Key.  
If you do want to set this Soft Key, go back step 3.  
If you do not want to set the currently displayed Soft Key but do want to set  
another Soft Key, go back to step 2.  
Redial / Pause (see pages 2.2 and 2.6 2.7)  
Dialing options (see page 3.1)  
Confirmation report (see page 3.21)*  
Memory transmission (see page 2.3)*  
Monitor / Call request (see pages 2.6 and 3.24)  
Fax & Copy (Default for MFX-1300) (see page 3.20)*  
TTI transmission (see page 4.2)*  
If you do not want to set any more Soft Keys, press STOPtofinish.  
Now you can use the labels included in your machine soriginal packaging to label the  
Soft Key function you just set.  
Security reception (see pages 3.49 3.50)  
Cover page (see page 3.22)*  
Negative / Positive copy (see page 2.17)  
Copy / Fax mode (see page 1.11)  
* When you change the setting by using the Soft Key,itwill be available only for the  
next transmission. Once that transmission is complete, your machine returns to its  
default setting. If you want to change the default setting, see Changing the default  
settings on page 4.1 4.11.  
3.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Document storage:  
Macro keys  
Regular polling documents(page 3.14)  
F-Code polling documents(page 3.29)  
If you perform the same operation repeatedly, you can automate the operation using a  
macro. A macro is a series of the several steps that you group together as a single com-  
mand to accomplish the operation automatically.  
Communications functions:  
A macro key faithfully records up to 60 steps that you performed to teach the macro.  
Delayed transmission (explained on pages 3.10)  
Broadcasting (page 3.9)  
You can teach the Macro keys to carry out any of the following jobs, but you cannot  
teach the operation regarding the machine settings.  
Regular polling (pages 3.14 3.15)  
Batch transmission (pages 3.11 3.13)  
F-Code transmission (page 3.33)  
F-Code polling (page 3.34)  
Note: One Macro key can hold only one job. It cannot combine two or more jobs.  
Copy:  
All copy settings  
Printouts:  
Programmingthe Macro key  
Machine settings list (page 4.11)  
Fax settings list (page 4.11)  
Press MACROPROGRAM,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Select Macro Key  
Copy settings list (page 4.11)  
M1:No Number Stored  
Activity journal (page 3.21)  
Delayed commands list (page 2.8)  
Delayed commands documents(page 2.8)  
One-touch list (page 3.3)  
Press the Macro key (M1orM2) you want to program or change. In this example,  
we ve chosen M2.  
2
Select Macro Key  
M2:No Number Stored  
Speed-dial list (page 3.5)  
Programmable one-touch numbers list (page 3.48)  
Call group directory (page 3.7)  
Press ENTER. If you chose the key already programmed, proceed to step 4.  
Otherwise, skip to step 5.  
3
4
Blocked numbers list (page 3.54)  
Sample cover page (page 3.22)  
Department time list (page 3.56)  
List of F-Code boxes (page 3.29)  
List of documents stored in F-Code boxes (page 3.29)  
Batch transmission documents(page 3.12)  
Batch box list (page 3.12)  
The LCDshows:  
Overwrite?  
Check Enter/Cancel  
If you want to overwrite the operation already programmed, press ENTER.  
If you want to overwrite only the job s name, press CANCELand go to step 9.  
Ifyoudo not want to overwrite the key you have choice, press STOP.  
The LCDofstand-by mode appears, which means the machine is ready to register  
the steps into the Macro key.  
List of stored batch documents(page 3.12)  
F-Code Box (bulletin box) documents(pages 3.30, 3.31)  
Macros list (page 3.19)  
5
Fax Ready  
Jun 01 2002 13:30  
Stored polling documents(page 3.14)  
Security receive documents(page 3.50)  
Note: Itkeeps beeping during the job registration in order to make notice of the  
registration mode.  
3.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Copying with the Macro key  
To copy using a Macro key:  
Press the keys exactly as you operate the job you want to program into the  
Macro key.  
6
Note: You can program up to 60 steps. When it comes over 60 steps, your fax  
machine asks if you register the operations you have entered. If you want  
to register them, press ENTER.If not, press STOP.  
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
Press the Macro keyin which you ve stored the copy command.  
Note: If you want to cancel the operations you have set, press  
MACROPROGRAM,STOPand then go back to step 1.  
Press START, if you have not registered START in the Macro key.  
Example 1: To program some operations for copy: Press COPY/FAX to change the  
copy mode, and set number of the copies, paper size, contrast, resolution, reduc-  
tion/enlargement rate and sort setting as you want.  
Printinglists using the Macro key  
To print a list using a Macro key:  
Note: See Making copies (pages 2.12 2.18) for detail operations.  
Press the Macro keyinwhich is programmed for the printing lists.  
1
Example 2: To program the operations for printing the one-touch numbers list:  
Press Program key,E,1,0,6,ENTER.  
Press ENTER, if you have not registered ENTERin the Macro key.  
2
If you programmed ENTERorSTARTinto the operation, proceed to step 8.  
Otherwise, press MACROPROGRAMand skip to step 9.  
Storing fax documents with the Macro key  
To store a fax document for either polling or F-Code polling using a Macro key:  
7
8
If you want to start immediately after pressing the Macro key when you use it,  
press ENTER. If not, press CANCEL.  
Insert the document.  
1
2
Note: If you want to confirm the settings or operations in the Macro key before  
you startit, press CANCELhere.  
Press the Macro keywhich is programmed for the storing operation you want to  
use.  
Include Start/Enter?  
Check Enter/Cancel  
Press ENTER, if you have not registered ENTERin the Macro key.  
3
Fax dialing with the Macro key  
To dial a fax call using a Macro key:  
The LCDnow shows:  
9
M2:Name  
_
;Upper  
M2:  
Name ;Upper  
Insert the document.  
or  
1
Delayed_  
Press the Macro keyin which you ve stored the fax communication command.  
2
The machine now asks you to name this job.  
Press START, if you have not registered START in the Macro key.  
3
Ifyoudo not want to enter or change this job s name, skip to step 11.  
Your fax will perform the operation now, or at whatever time you programmed.  
If you programmed this key to delay its operation, the LCDshows:  
Enter the name by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review Entering  
characters , page 1.12) A job s name may be up to 130 characters in length.  
10  
11  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
** Reserved **  
Jun 01 2002 17:17  
If you programmed this key to perform the operation immediately after you press it, the  
LCDshows the number:  
9-1-972-555-4335  
A4 Normal  
3.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Press or until the mode you want appears. The possible settings are:  
Erasing a Macro key  
2
3
Press MACROPROGRAMtwice, ENTER.The LCDshows:  
Macro Speed  
:Norm  
1
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Select Macro Key  
M1:Activity journal  
Macro Speed  
:Slow  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press the Macro key (M1orM2) you want to erase. Here, we ve chosen M2.  
2
Select Macro Key  
M2:Batch box list  
Macro Speed  
:Fast  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
Erase Macro  
Check Enter/Cancel  
Important: If you want to quit without erasing the Macro key you ve selected,  
press CANCEL.The machine will return to step 2.  
Press ENTERto erase the job.  
4
Erase Macro  
** Complete **  
To erase another Macro key, repeat steps 2 4. Or press STOPto return to standby  
mode.  
Printing a list of your Macro keys  
Your fax machine can print a list of the Macro keys.  
The list includes:  
(1) each key s Macro key number  
(2) the name of the job stored in the Macro key  
ToprintalistofMacrokeys,press Program key,E,1,1,7,ENTER.  
Setting the speed for Macros  
You can adjust the speed of one step in the Macro key.  
Press MACROPROGRAMthree times, ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Macro Speed  
:Norm  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
3.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Fax & Copy  
The LCDchanges copy mode and asks the number of copies you want to make.  
4
5
6
W ith the Fax & Copy feature turned on, your machine asks if you want to make a copy  
of a document each time it transmits that document from memory.  
Fax & Copy  
1
Ltr Auto 100%  
Note: The Fax & Copy function cannot be used for real time transmission, and when  
the copy protection feature is set to on.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of copies you want for each page in  
the document. Choose from 01 to 99 copies.  
Note: Quick Memory transmission (see page 2.3) and the Fax & Copy function cannot  
be used at the same time. If both are turned on, Quick Memory will not work.  
Note: If you want to quit without transmitting and copying the document, press  
STOP.The machine returns to standby mode.  
Note: The Fax & Copy feature will use the same resolution you set for the transmis-  
sion for the copy s scanning resolution.  
Press STARTto begin the transmission and copying process.  
Helpfultip: If you do not wish to make a copy,press CANCELin step 4. The LCDwill  
show:  
Setting the Fax & Copy function  
Press Program key,B,1,0,6, ENTER.  
1
Canceled Copying  
Start/Stop  
Fax & Copy  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
To cancel the making copy,press START.The machine start transmis-  
sion process without copying the document.  
If you press STOP, the machine return to step 4.  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen On.  
2
Fax & Copy  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Setting the activity journal  
Just as a checkbook records your daily financial transactions, your fax machine keeps  
an activityjournal which records its 100 most recent fax transactions. The activity jour-  
nallists the following information for each transaction:  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
4
Press STOPto return to standby mode.  
Assigned number,starting each day at 001  
Remote location called  
Helpfultip: If your machine is MFX-1300, you can turn on or off by simply pressing  
FAX  
&
COPYassigned to a Soft Key. If your machine is MFX-1700 and you  
frequently turn this feature on and off, you can assign it to a Soft key (see  
page 3.16).  
Resolution mode  
Starting date and time  
Duration, in minutes and seconds  
Length, in number of pages  
Department code (see page 3.55)  
Using the Fax & Copy function  
Place the document and select resolution and contrast you require.  
1
2
Note: W iththisfunction, youcannotselectnormaland halftone resolution.  
Result of the call If preceded by an asterisk (*),this signifies an ECMcommunica-  
tion. If preceded by a pound (#), this signifies communication was via the highspeed  
V.34 modem.  
Enter the fax number. Either press a one-touch key, enter a speed-dial number,call  
group number or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number.  
Any special operations For example, a fax call made using an optional handset  
will appear as Manual  
If you entered the fax number using a one-touch key,skip to step 4.  
Otherwise, go on to step 3.  
Press START.  
3
3.20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Your fax machine will print the activity journal automatically after 100 transactions. To  
toggle this automatic printing on or of:f  
Setting the reports:TCRs  
Your fax machine can print a transmit confirmation report (TCR)after sending every fax to  
Press Program key,C,1,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
any Group 3 fax machine.The TCRlists the following information for each communica-  
tion:  
1
Journal AutoPrt.:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Date and time ofthe TCRs printout  
Remote location called  
Resolution mode  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Here, we ve chosen On.  
2
Starting date and time  
Journal AutoPrt.:On  
Duration, in minutes and seconds  
Length, in number of pages  
Result ofthe call  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
Any special operations For example, a fax call made using an optional handset  
will appear as Manual  
Printing an activity journal manually  
To print an activity journal immediately without waiting for 100 transmissions to be com-  
pleted, press Program key,E,1,0,4,ENTER.  
Sample of the document Animage of the first page of the document  
If an error occurs, the TCRtells you the remote location which was called, the error code  
and error message (see pages 5.9 5.11).  
Setting the printing order of the activity journal  
Your fax machine prints the activity journal for every fax transaction. For example, if  
your machine has to redial a call, it will list those redials on the journal.  
To set the printing of TCR:  
Press Program key,C,1,0,3,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
If you want to list those activities in the order of their assigned numbers, you can  
change the printing order of the activity journal. To change the printing order:  
Report AutoPrint:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press Program key,C,1,0,2,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Press or until the setting you want appears.  
Here, we ve chosen On.  
2
Journal Line Up :Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Report AutoPrint:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
2
If you want the activity journal to print in the order of assigned number, choose  
On .  
Otherwise, the machine will list every fax transaction of the same command and  
same location.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
Helpfultip: If you frequently turn this feature on and off, you can set a Soft key (see  
page 3.16) to turn on or off by simply pressing that key.  
Here, we ve chosen On.  
Journal Line Up :On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
3.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Entering the cover page message  
Cover page  
Press Program key,C,2,0,2,ENTER.  
Your fax machine can store a cover page to send at the beginning of each outgoing fax.  
This page includes the current date and time, your Location ID and your fax number (as  
stored in the TTI) and a message of up to 40 characters in length. The information  
appears in a box similar to this:  
1
2
Use the one-touch keypad to enter a message for the cover page. Enter the mes-  
sage the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart.The message  
can be up to 40 characters in length.  
Important: As in EasyStart, enter letters and other non-numeric characters by  
using the one-touch keys.  
Fax Message From:  
Jun 1 2002 14:00  
When the message appears as you want it, press ENTERto save it.  
3
Printing the cover page  
To confirm that the cover page is set correctly, print a sample cover page from your fax  
machine. Press Program key,E,1,1,1,ENTER.  
Name:  
And Sew It Goes Co.  
972-555-2009  
Fax Number:  
[We appreciate your business. Thank you!]  
Turning the cover page on  
Press Program key,C,2,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Cover Page  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
To tell the fax machine it should send a cover page before each document you  
transmit, press or until On appears on the LCD.  
2
Cover Page  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: To tell the machine not to send a cover page, press or until Off  
appears on the LCDand press STOP.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
Now the cover page feature is working but your message line (shown in the example as  
We appreciate your business. Thank you! ) is blank. To enter that message, see  
Entering the cover page message, next page.  
3.22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
To use DRDon your fax machine:  
OneLine + distinctive ring detection  
Contact your phone company to make sure it has set up DRDservice for you. If  
possible, also find out which distinctive ring pattern the phone company has  
assigned you.  
Many phone companies now offer their customers a special service which makes it pos-  
sible for one phone line to do the work of two.  
1
2
W ith this service, you physically still have one phone line, but, electronically, you have  
two phone numbers. Your phone recognizes these different numbers and rings differ-  
ently for each one.  
When your machine is MFX-1300;Press Program key,B,2,1,4,ENTER.  
When your machine is MFX-1700;Press Program key,B,2,1,5,ENTER.  
The LCDshows:  
For example, this makes it easy for you to have both a business number and a home  
number on one phone line, so you can answer one with Jane Doe Consulting, and the  
other with Hello. This works because you can tell the difference between the distinc-  
tivepatterns of the two rings.  
DRD  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Here, we ve chosen On.  
Your fax machine is also smart enough to tell the difference between two different num-  
bers that are ringing it. All you have to do is set up your machine for the OneLine +  
distinctive ring detection (DRD) feature.  
3
DRD  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
In order to use OneLine + DRD,your phone company must set up your distinctive ring  
service. When it does, it will assign a ringpattern. For example, the standard telephone  
ring is 2 seconds on (ringing) and 4 seconds off (silent),after which it repeatsitself.  
Press ENTER.  
4
5
Your fax has eight possible distinctive ring patterns for use with OneLine + DRD. One of  
them should work with your phone company sDRDservice. This chart lists the patterns:  
Ring Pattern  
:A  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Pattern  
One complete ring pattern (seconds)  
Press or until the pattern you want appears.  
Here, we ve chosen  
C.  
0.8 on, 0.4 off, 0.8 on, 4.0 off  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
0.4 on, 0.2 off, 0.4 on, 0.2 off, 0.8 on, 4.0 off  
0.3 on, 0.2 off, 1.0 on, 0.2 off, 0.3 on, 4.0 off  
1.0 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 3.5 off  
Ring Pattern  
:C  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto set your machine to the displayed ring pattern.  
6
0.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 3.0 off  
0.5 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 3.0 off  
0.4 on, 0.6 off, 0.4 on, 4.6 off  
Important: If your telephone company gives you only very general ring pattern speci-  
fications, or if you encounter a problem while using your machine sDRD  
feature, please try ALLof the listed ring patterns. Ifyou still have a  
problem aftertrying all of the patterns, please call the Muratec Customer  
Support Center. (From the United States, call 800-347-3296.  
1.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5on, 3.5off  
Important: W ith your machine set for using DRD, it won t respond to any ring pattern  
other than the one you selected above. To reset the fax so it will respond  
once again to normal rings, repeat steps 2 4, above except, instep 3,  
toggleitto Off. Your fax will now respond normally.  
For example: pattern  
C
is 0.3 seconds ringing, 0.2 seconds silent, 1 second ringing, 0.2  
seconds silent, 0.3 seconds ringing and 4 seconds silent. Then it goes back to the first  
0.3-second ring and starts over.  
3.23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Responding to a call request  
If someone requestsacallfrom you during a fax communication, you ll hear a long ring  
after the receiving machine has received each page. To answer the call request:  
Call request  
You can send or receive a fax message and have a regular phone conversation on the  
same call (although, not at the same time). This is called a call request. It doesn t matter  
whether you re sending the fax or receiving it. You may fax first and then talk,ortalkfirst  
and then fax.  
Lift your machine s optional handset, and listen for a few seconds. You may hear  
a brief series of fax tones.  
1
Important: For this feature to work, the remote fax machine must have a similar call-  
request capability.Your machine must also have an optional handset  
attached.  
Shortly, the line will open and the person at the other end of the line will answer.  
You and the other person now can have a normal phone conversation.  
2
Faxing/receiving first, then talking  
To send or receive a fax first and then talk:  
Page counter  
You can confirm the number of totalprinted pages on the LCD.  
While your fax machine is sending or receiving the fax, press MONITOR/CALL.  
Total The totalpages your machine has printed.  
1
2
Copy The totalpages printed for copying.  
At the remote fax machine, the ringer will sound after that machine receives each  
page.  
Fax The totalpages printed for received fax messages.  
Printer The totalpages printed for list printing and PC printing.  
If someone answers at the remote fax machine, your fax machine will ring several  
times. If so, pick up the optional handset. In a few seconds, the line will open and  
you can begin your conversation.  
3
Note: PC printing is available only when your machine has the optional  
printer controller kit.  
Press COPYCOUNT.The LCDshows the totalpages your machine has printed up to  
the present:  
1
Talking first, then sending afax  
Totalk first and then send a fax:  
Total  
:000026813  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Stop  
When you ve finished your phone conversation, don t hang up.  
1
2
3
4
Pressing ,theLCDwill change as follows:  
Insert the document you want to fax.  
2
Copy  
:000014702  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Stop  
Adjust the resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Tell the person at the other fax machine to press STARTand to hang up his/her  
handset. Don t hang up yourhandset yet!  
Fax  
:000006412  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Stop  
When you hear fax tones, press STARTand hang up your fax machine soptional  
handset. Your fax machine will send the document.  
5
Talking first, then receiving afax  
Totalk first and then receive a fax:  
Printer :000005679  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Stop  
When you ve finished your phone conversation, don t hang up.  
When you finish confirming them, press STOP.  
The machine will return to standby mode.  
1
2
3
Tell the person at the other fax machine to press STARTand to hang up his/her  
handset. Don t hang up your handset yet!  
When you hear fax tones, press STARTand hang up your machine soptional  
handset. Your machine will receive the document and print it out.  
3
3.24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
The power of QuadAccessfi  
F-Code Boxes  
Your fax machine sQuadAccessfeature sharply reduces the time you might spend wait-  
ing for the machine to finish its work. QuadAccess is a more powerful version of what  
already is a pretty powerful feature, called dual access. While a fax with normal dual  
access allows you to do two things at once, QuadAccess allows you to do four operations  
atonce. For example, evenifthemachine is (1) printing a copy, (2) transmitting from  
memory and (3) scanning documentsforadifferent memory transmission, you can still  
(4) program the machine.  
F-Code: an introduction  
The ITU-T, the United Nations agency that standardizes international telecommunica-  
tions, has created a fax industry standard for using sub-addressing and  
password-based communication. One name for this standard is F-Code, and that s what  
we ll call it in these instructions and on your machine s display.  
How sub-addressing works  
Note: If your machine is MFX-1300:  
To help understand sub-addressing, think about how someone in a large company  
receives mail. For example, mail for the Accounting department is first delivered to the  
company smain mailroom. Then the mailroom routes the mail to Accounting.  
The MFX-1300 cannot printing and scanning at same time.  
If you try to scanning the document during the machine is printing, the  
following message will be shown:  
That s the idea behind sub-addressing. Your fax and another F-Code-compatible fax  
exchange special signals to indicate just where the fax really should go. It sasifthe  
sending fax is saying, Deliver this to room 48, and the receiving fax does just that.  
OK: Will Scan Soon  
If the machine is printing the lists, the machine will scan the document after  
the printing is finished.  
Your machine has up to 50 mailboxes for these special deliveries. When someone  
sends an F-Code fax to you, your machine receives it into one of those 50 mailboxes  
whichever box the sender chooses.  
If the machine is printing the stored document or received document, the  
machine will pause the current printing job and it will give priority to scan-  
ning the document. After scanning is finished, the machine resumes the  
printing job.  
Sending F-Code securely  
For greater security, you can set up a password with each F-Code sub-address, which  
lets you use secure transmission, polling and relay broadcasting when communicating  
with any other F-Code compatible fax machine.  
Guidelines for using F-Code  
(1) To use ITU- sub-addressing, you must create F-Code boxes in your machine  
T
(2) Your machine holds up to 50 of these boxes  
(3) Your machine stores up to 30 documents into each F-Code box (each document  
can include one or more pages)  
Creating or modifying an F-Code box  
Choosing the F-Code box type  
Before you set up an F-Code box, first decide how your callers will use it as a  
bulletin box, a security box or a relay box.  
Bulletin box Stores documentsthat people in remote locations retrieve by polling  
the box. For example, your sales branches could call in at any time to get a printout  
of your latest prices that you ve stored in a bulletin box.  
A bulletin box stores both scanned and retrieved documents,and it holds its  
contentsindefinitely (as long as the unit has ACpower).  
Security box Receives and stores F-Code secure communications.  
3.25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Relay box Receives documents, then relays them to other machines. The  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the 4-digit  
I
.
D.code (not the ITU-  
T
sub-address  
6
7
machine that relays the document is called a hub . Your fax machine can either  
sendtoahub or it can be a hub.  
and not the ITU-  
T
password) and then press ENTER.  
Note: If you enter an invalid  
aborts this operation.  
I.D.code, the fax machine rejects the attempt and  
4 elements of an F-Code box  
Each F-Code box has the following four elements:  
(1) F-Code box number (01-50)  
The machine is now asking you to name this F-Code box. The LCDshows:  
03:Box Name;Upper  
_
03:Box Name;Upper  
Muratec America_  
or  
(2) F-Code box name (up to 16 characters)  
(3) F-Code sub-address (up to 20 characters - can include numbers and the *and #  
characters only)  
If you do not want to enter or change this F-Code box s name, skip to step 9.  
If you do want to enter or change this F-Code box s name, go on to step 8.  
(4)ID. Code (4 digits)  
.
Enter the name by using the one-touch keys. (If necessary, review Entering  
characters , page 1.12) An F-Code box s name can be up to 16 characters in  
length.  
You will choose the information for each of these elements, and enter it into your  
machine. The following steps will walk you through entering and changing that informa-  
tion.  
8
9
Press ENTERto save the box s name and continue. The LCDshows:  
To create or modify an F-Code box:  
03:Sub-Address No.  
_
03:Sub-Address No.  
123456_  
Keep pen and paper with you as you follow these steps.As you decide on a sub-  
address and enter it into your machine, write it down. Remember to:  
(1) write down which box goes with which sub-address, (2) write down any pass-  
or  
1
The fax machine now asks for this F-Code box s sub-address. This is the numeri-  
cal identifier you must enter in order to communicate with any remote F-Code  
compatible fax.  
words or ID.codes you enter,(3) keep these printed records in a safe place.  
.
Press Program key,C,4,0,1,ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a  
name entered for F-Code box 01,theLCDshows:  
2
3
If you do not want to change an existing sub-address, skip to step 11.  
Select F-Code Box  
01:No Number Stored  
Select F-Code Box  
01:NY Branch Office  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the sub-address to identify this F-Code box.  
The sub-address can be up to 20 characters in length and include any  
combination of numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-numeric  
characters).  
or  
10  
11  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code box  
you want to create or modify. Here, we ve entered 0,3 and see either:  
03:Sub-Address No.  
654321_  
Select F-Code Box  
03:No Number Stored  
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
or  
Note: No other F-Code box in this machine can have the same sub-address as  
the one you enter here.  
If want to select a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD, use  
the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit F-Code box number now.  
4
5
Press ENTERto save the sub-address.  
Press ENTER. What you do next depends on whether you re creating or  
modifying the F-Code box:  
If creating skip to step 7.  
Note: If you entered a sub-address already being used by another F-Code box,  
the machine beepsand briefly displays:  
If modifying the LCDasks you to enter the proper ID.code. The LCDshows:  
.
03:Sub-Address No.  
Sub-Address In Use  
03:Set F-Code Box  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
The machine now returns you to step 10. Please enter a different number  
for your F-Code box s sub-address.  
3.26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Rx Protect Reception protection tellsthisboxifit s okay to receive  
Next, the machine asks for your F-Code box spassword. This is the password for  
ITU-T-compatible F-Code fax transactions. The LCDshows:  
12  
13  
documentsfrom remote locations. Callers can then poll these documents.  
Rx Protect  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
03:Password  
_
03:Password  
123456789*#_  
or  
On: Do not open this box to receive documentsfrom callers.  
Of:f Openthis box to receive documentsfrom callers.  
Note: You don t need to have a password for the F-Code box. However,using a  
password will make your F-Code communication much more secure.  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Then press ENTERto save the setting and go on to the next one.  
Ifyoudo not want to enter or change this box spassword, skip to step 14.  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter this box s ITU-T-compatible password. This pass-  
word can be up to 20 characters in length and include any combination of  
numbers and the * and # characters (but no other non-numerical characters).  
Here, we ve entered 135*7#9.  
Auto Print Automatic printing of received documentstells the fax machine if it  
should print a document automatically upon receiving it into this box.  
Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection (Rx protect)  
setting is set to off (see above).  
03:Password  
135*7#9_  
Auto Print  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: You cannot change the type of an existing F-Code box. If you re modify-  
ing an existing F-Code box and want to change the box type,youfirst  
must erase the old box, then create a new one.  
On: Print the document automatically when the box receives it.  
Of:f Print the document manually, when you want to print it.  
Press ENTERto save the password. The LCDnow shows:  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Then press ENTERto save the setting and go on to the next one.  
14  
15  
Box Type :Bulletin  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Overwrite Doc Overwriting documentstells your machine if it should overwrite  
(erase) existing documents when it receives a new one.  
The fax machine is asking which box type you want to assign to this box bul-  
letin,security orrelay.  
Note: This setting is available only when the reception protection setting is set  
tooff(see Rx Protect above).  
Press or until the type of box you want appears.  
Overwrite Doc. :Off  
Press ENTER.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
If you chose Bulletin, go on to step 16.  
If you chose Security, skip to step 17.  
If you chose Relay,skip to step 20.  
On: When your machine receives a new document into this box, it will erase any  
documentscurrently stored in it.  
Of:f When your machine receives a new document into this box, it willnot erase  
the documentsstoredinit. Your machine can store up to 30  
If you chose Bulletin:  
The bulletin box has four additional settings:  
documents(each document can include one or more pages) in each box.  
16  
Reception protection ( Rx Protect on the LCD)  
Automatic printing of received documents(AutoPrint)  
Overwriting documents ( Overwrite Doc. )  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Then press ENTERto save the setting and go on to the next one.  
Erasure of transmitted documents (Erase Tx Doc. )  
3.27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Erase Tx Doc Erasure of transmitted documentstells your machine if it should  
Enter the fax number using a one-touch key, a speed-dial number or a call group  
number.You cannot use the numeric keypad to enter these numbers.  
21  
22  
erase a document from the box after a caller retrieves (polls) the  
document.  
To add each fax number,press BROADCASTbetween each one to insert a comma,  
then enter the number.You can specify up to 200 numbers for a remote unit.  
Erase Tx Doc. :Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Enter Relay Number  
S001,G12_  
On: Your machine erases the document from the box as soon as it sends it. If  
you choose On , this box can be polled only once per document.  
Of:f Your machine does not erase a document from the box when it spolled. As  
long as your machine holds ACpower and you do not erase the document  
from the box, the document is available indefinitely for polling.  
Press ENTERto save the settings. The LCDshows:  
Select TTI :Sender  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Press ENTERto save the setting. Then skip to step 24.  
The machine asks for the type of TTI you want to appear on the faxes that are  
relayed to other callers.  
If you chose Security:  
Sender Relay the document with sender unit sTTI (dont send your TTI).  
Both Relay the document with both the sender unit sTTI and your TTI.  
Yours Relay the document with your TTI instead of the sender unit s.  
The machine asks how long you want to keep a document stored in your  
machine s F-Code box. The LCDshows:  
17  
F-Code Doc Hold Time  
Hold Time (00-31):00  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Press ENTERto save the settings. The LCDshows:  
23  
Use the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit number indicating how many days  
(00-31), you want your fax machine to keep received documents in this F-Code  
box. Here, we ve entered 09, for nine days:  
Auto Print  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
18  
On: Print the document automatically when it s received.  
Of:f The machine does not print it, but only relays it to the other machine.  
F-Code Doc Hold Time  
Hold Time (00-31):09  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Then press ENTERto save the settings and go on to step 24.  
Note: Your fax machine can store incoming documents in F-Code boxes (up to  
30 documents)aslong as 31 days, after which it automatically erases the  
documents. But if your machine has plenty of memory, you may want to  
override the 31-day limit in order to keep the documentsindefinitely.Ifso,  
enter 00. If you choose this, you will have to delete documents manually.  
(You may want to contact your authorized Muratec dealer regarding  
optional memory expansion.)  
The machine asks for your F-Code box sfour-digit security  
I.D.code. This is the  
24  
25  
I.D.code for the box s security, which you use to (1) print a document any remote  
F-Code-compatible fax sends to this F-Code box or (2) you enter before you can  
make any changes to this F-Code box.  
03:Set F-Code Box  
Enter I.D. Code:0000  
Press ENTERto save the settings. Skip to step 24.  
19  
If you do not want to change the  
Decide on a four-digit D.code (0001-9999)for this F-Code box.  
W rite it down, and put it in a safe place.  
Important: Do not use 0000asan D.code.  
I.D.code, skip to step 27.  
If you chose Relay:  
I.  
The machine asks for the fax number for the remote unit.  
The LCDshows:  
20  
I.  
Enter Relay Number  
_
3.28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Using a bulletin box  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the four-digit ID.code for this F-Code box.  
.
26  
27  
Important: After completing this step, you must know this code to print docu-  
mentssent to this F-Code box. Be sure to write it down.  
Storing a document  
Your fax machine can store up to 30 documentsineach bulletin box.  
Press ENTERto save the F-Code box information.  
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
The bulletin box must exist on your fax machine.  
To create or modify another F-Code box, repeat steps 3-27.  
To finish, press STOP.  
You must know the bulletin box s two-digit number (01-50)and four-digit  
I.D.  
code. (See Creating or Modifying an F-Code box, pages 3.25 3.29, if nec-  
essary.)  
Printing a list of F-Code boxes  
The list of F-Code boxes includes:  
To store a document in a bulletin box for polling.  
(1) Each box s identifier number  
(2) Box name (if any)  
(3) Sub-address  
(4)Password  
(5) Box type  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments.  
1
2
Press Program key,D,1,0,2,ENTERThe LCDshows:  
Select F-Code Box  
01:No Number Stored  
Select F-Code Box  
01:Murata Machinery  
or  
(6) Each box ssettings  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the two-digit identifier number (01-50)ofthe F-  
Code box where you want to store the document.  
Here, we ve entered 0,3:  
To print a list of your F-Code boxes, press Program key,E,1,1,3,ENTER.  
3
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
Printing a list of documents stored in your F-Code boxes  
The list of documents stored in your machine s F-Code boxes includes:  
If you want to use a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD,  
enter the box number now.  
4
5
(1) Each box s identifier number  
(2) Box name (if any)  
(3) Box type  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
(4) Each file number (or document number) that is stored  
03:F-Code Document  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
To print a list of documents stored in F-Code boxes, press Program key,E,1,1,4,  
ENTER.  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the four-digit  
Here, we ve entered 2345:  
I.D.code.  
6
03:F-Code Document  
Enter I.D. Code:2345  
3.29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Press ENTER.  
If you ve entered an incorrect  
returns to standby mode.  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
7
3
4
I
.
D.code, your fax machine rejects the attempt and  
03:F-Code Document  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
If you ve entered the correct  
I.D.code, the display shows:  
Overwrite Doc. :Off  
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box sfour-digit  
Here we ve entered 2345:  
I.D.code.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
03:F-Code Document  
If you choose:  
Enter I.D. Code:2345  
On: Your bulletin box erases the currently stored document when a new  
document is stored in it  
Of:f Your bulletin box keeps both the currently stored document and the new  
document, up to 30 documents in each box.  
Press ENTER.  
If you ve entered an incorrect  
aborts this operation.  
5
6
I.D.code, your fax machine rejects the attempt and  
If you ve entered the correct  
I.D.code, the display shows:  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
8
9
03:F-Code Document  
Press ENTERto save the setting. Your machine starts scanning the document into  
the selected bulletin box:  
File No.  
:_  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the file number (1-30) of the document you want  
to print. Here we ve entered 3.  
F-Code Doc. File: 1  
A4  
Mem 99%  
03:F-Code Document  
Important: The file number (shown above as 1) tells you how many docu-  
mentsare in this bulletin box. Your machine numbers files 1-30.  
You need to know the file s number to erase or print it.  
File No.  
:3_  
Note: If you want to print alldocumentsstored in the bulletin box, simply enter  
0 (zero).  
Press ENTER.  
Printing a document stored in a bulletin box  
7
Your fax machine prints the chosen document(s), then returns to standby mode.  
You can print a document stored in your machine s F-Code bulletin boxes without eras-  
ing the document from memory.  
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly dis-  
plays the following before returning to standby mode:  
To print a stored document:  
03:Select F-Code Box  
No Document Stored  
Press Program key,D,3,0,2,ENTERThe LCDshows:  
1
Select F-Code Box  
01:Murata Machinery  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code bul-  
letin box that stores the document you want to print. We ve entered 03:  
2
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
3.30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Erasing a document stored in a bulletin box  
To erase a stored document:  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
7
8
03:F-Code Document  
Check  
Enter/Stop  
Press Program key,D,2,0,2,ENTERThe LCDshows:  
1
Note: If you want to quit without erasing any document in the bulletin box, press  
STOP.The machine will return to standby mode.  
Select F-Code Box  
01:Murata Machinery  
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly dis-  
plays the following and then returns to standby mode:  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code bul-  
letin box that stores the document you want to erase. We ve entered 03:  
2
03:F-Code Document  
No Document Stored  
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
Press ENTERto erase the document(s) and to return to standby mode.  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
3
F-Code Document  
** Complete **  
03:F-Code Document  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
Note: If the F-Code box is not storing any documents, the machine briefly dis-  
plays the following before returning to step 2:  
Using a security box  
Select F-Code Box  
No Document Stored  
Printing a document you receive  
When your fax machine receives a document via ITU- sub-addressing to an F-Code  
T
security box, your machine prints a message to let you know.The message lists:(1)the  
F-Code box number that received the document, (2) the Box name, (3) the remote  
machine sTTI (if any), and (4) the file numbers stored in the F-Code box.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box sfour-digit  
Here we ve entered 2345:  
ID.code.  
.
4
5
03:F-Code Document  
Enter I.D. Code:2345  
You then have a certain number of days (see step 17 and 18 on page 3.28) in which to  
print out the document before your machine automatically erases it.  
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
You must know the F-Code security box s two-digit number.  
Press ENTER.  
If you ve entered an incorrect  
aborts this operation.  
I.D.code, your fax machine rejects the attempt and  
You must know the F-Code security box sfour-digit  
I.D.code.  
If you ve entered the correct  
I.D.code, the display shows:  
To print a received message:  
03:F-Code Document  
Press Program key,D,3,0,2,ENTERThe LCDshows:  
File No.  
:_  
1
2
Select F-Code Box  
01:Murata Machinery  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the file number (1-30) of the document you want  
to erase. Here we ve entered 3.  
6
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit number (01-50) of the F-Code bul-  
letin box that stores the document you want to print. We ve entered 03:  
03:F-Code Document  
File No.  
:3_  
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
Note: If you want to erase alldocumentsstored in the bulletin box, enter 0  
(zero).  
3.31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Erasing an empty F-Code box  
An F-Code box must be empty in order to erase it. (If you select an F-Code box in these  
steps which is not empty, the machine beeps. If this happens, print all documentsinthat  
box before erasing it.)  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
3
03:F-Code Document  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
Note: If the F-Code security box is not storing any documents, the machine  
briefly displays the following before returning to step 2:  
To erase an empty F-Code box:  
Press Program key,C,4,0,2,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
03:Select F-Code Box  
No Document Stored  
Select F-Code Box  
Select F-Code Box  
or  
01:No Number Stored  
01:Murata Machinery  
Use the numeric keypad to enter your F-Code box sfour-digit  
Here we ve entered 2345:  
ID.code.  
.
4
5
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the two-digit identifier number (01-50)ofthe F-  
Code box you want to erase. Here, we ve entered 0,3 and see:  
2
03:F-Code Document  
Enter I.D. Code:2345  
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
Press ENTER.  
If you want to erase a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD,  
enter the box number now.  
If you ve entered the correct  
I.D.code, your fax machine prints all documents  
3
4
in the F-Code security box and then erases them.  
Press ENTER. If the F-Code box is empty,theLCDshows:  
If you ve entered an incorrect  
and returns to standby mode.  
I.D.code, your fax machine aborts the operation  
03:Erase F-Code Box  
Enter I.D. Code:****  
Using a relay box  
Once your fax machine receives a document via ITU- sub-addressing to one of itsF-  
Important: If you select an F-Code box which is not empty, the machine beeps  
and, before returning to step 3, briefly displays:  
T
Code relay boxes, it sends it to the other fax machines that you ve set up on your relay  
box. (See Creating or Modifying an F-Code box , pages 3.25 3.29.)  
Select F-Code Box  
Box In Use  
If you set the Auto print mode to on when you created the relay box, your machine will  
print the received document, then relay it to the other machine. Otherwise, your  
machine will only relay it to the other machines, not print it. See If you chose Relay,  
pages 3.28 3.29 for more details on this setting.  
Print any documents received in the F-Code box, then repeat this  
procedure from the beginning to erase the box.  
Otherwise, select another F-Code box.  
Also, you can send (relay broadcast initiation) the document to another hub machine s  
F-Code box and get that machine to relay it to others. See F-Code transmission on  
pages 3.33 3.34 for more detail.  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the four-digit  
Here, we ve entered 2345:  
I.D.code.  
5
03:Erase F-Code Box  
Enter I.D. Code:2345  
The hub performs a relay broadcast, and the machine which sends the original docu-  
ment to the hub has performed a relay broadcast initiation.  
3.32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Press ENTER.  
If you ve entered an incorrect  
returns to standby mode.  
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONSthree times and then press ENTER.  
6
7
4
5
I
.
D.code, your fax machine rejects the attempt and  
Enter Sub-Address  
_
If you ve entered the correct  
I.D.code, the display shows:  
03:Erase F-Code Box  
Check Enter/Cancel  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate sub-address in the remote  
machine. In this example, we ve entered 123456.  
Enter Sub-Address  
123456_  
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the F-Code box you ve selected, press  
CANCEL.The fax will return to step 2.  
Note: If you want to quit without erasing any F-Code box, press STOP.  
The machine returns to standby mode.  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCELto erase the character, then enter  
the correct number.  
Press ENTERto erase the F-Code box.  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
6
Erase F-Code Box  
** Complete **  
Enter Password  
_
To erase another F-Code box, repeat steps2-7.  
To finish, press STOP.  
Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 8.  
Use the numeric keypadtoenterthepassword. In this example, we ve entered  
654321.  
7
8
Enter Password  
654321_  
F-Code transmission and polling  
W ith F-Code, your machine can send secure transmissions, perform relay broadcast ini-  
tiations and even poll from other ITU-T-equipped machines, regardless of manufacturer.  
You can do this two ways:  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
Enter Fax Number  
_
Using the programmable one-touch key (see pages 3.40 3.43)  
Entering the ITU-  
T
sub-address and password directly, which is what we ll describe  
here.  
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-dial  
number or dialing from the numeric keypad. Do not press START.  
9
Note: For F-Code communication to work, three things must be true:  
The remote fax machine must support ITU- sub-addressing  
The remote fax must have a mailbox with an ITU- sub-address created on it  
You must know the ITU- sub-address and password (if any) for the remote  
T
What you do now depends on when you want the transmission to begin.  
To have it begin now, skip to step 13.  
10  
T
T
To delay it, go on to step 11.  
machine s mailbox  
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
11  
F-Code transmission  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 15/17:05  
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the transmission should  
begin, then press ENTER.  
Adjust the resolution and contrast if necessary.  
12  
13  
If you want to toggle between real time transmission and memory transmission,  
press MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
Press START.  
3.33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
If in step 10 you chose an immediate transmission, your fax machine begins dialing. If  
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
9
you chose a delayed command, the machine shows Reserved on the LCD, indicating  
that it has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 15/17:05  
F-Code polling  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the polling should begin,  
then press ENTER.  
10  
11  
Press FAX to switch the machine to Fax mode.  
1
2
Press START.  
Press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONSfour times and then press ENTER.  
Enter Sub-Address  
_
If in step 8 you chose an immediate polling, your fax machine begins dialing. If you  
chose a delayed command, the machine shows Reserved on the LCD, indicatingthatit  
has stored the command in memory and will complete it later.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate sub-address.  
In this example, we ve entered 123456.  
3
Enter Sub-Address  
123456_  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCELto erase the character, then enter  
the correct number.  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
4
Enter Password  
_
Note: If this sub-address does not have a password, skip to step 6.  
Use the numeric keypadtoenterthepassword. In this example, we ve entered  
654321.  
5
Enter Password  
654321_  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
6
Enter Fax Number  
_
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-dial  
number or dialing from the numeric keypad. Do not press START.  
7
What you do now depends upon when you want the polling to begin.  
8
To have it begin now, skip to step 11.  
To delay it, go on to step 9.  
3.34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
List of stored batch documents(page 3.12)  
Macros list (page 3.19)  
Programmable one-touch keys  
Using the power of programmable one-touch keys  
Document storage:  
In order to complete some operations on your machine, you may have to follow several  
steps and press several different buttons. But programming your machine sone-touch  
keys (P1 and P2) can reduce those many steps to a simple press of a key.  
Regular polling documents(page 3.14)  
F-Code polling documents(page 3.29)  
You can teach the one-touch keys to carry out any of the following operations:  
Programming a delayed transmission  
To program a delayed transmission into a programmable one-touch key:  
Communications functions:  
Delayed transmission (explained on pages 3.10)  
Broadcasting (page 3.9)  
Press Program key,A,3,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows the first empty programma-  
ble one-touch number available:  
1
Regular polling (pages 3.14 3.15)  
Batch transmission (pages 3.11 3.13)  
F-Code transmission (page 3.33)  
F-Code polling (page 3.34)  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Note: IfP2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a num-  
ber for P1.You can see what you programmed into P1 by pressing ,if  
you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling document,  
you will see:  
To teach these keys, you tell the machine four simple things:  
How The key you re programming  
Select Program No.  
P1:Polling Document  
Who The number(s) the machine should dial  
What The operation it should perform  
Press to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to  
enter.  
When The date(s) and time(s) when you want it to perform the operation  
Printouts:  
Note: Toerase a programmable one-touch key,see page 3.48.  
Machine settings list (page 4.11)  
Fax settings list (page 4.11)  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P2.  
2
3
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Copy settings list (page 4.11)  
Activity journal (page 3.21)  
Delayed commands list (page 2.8)  
One-touch list (page 3.3)  
Note: If you re changing a previously stored command: If your previous com-  
mand for this key was a for a delayed operation, and you want to keep  
this key programmed for a delayed operation, use these instructions to  
make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a completely different  
operation for batch transmission, then you must first erase the stored  
command before programming the new one.  
Speed-dial list (page 3.5)  
Programmable one-touch numbers list (page 3.48)  
Call group directory (page 3.7)  
Blocked numbers list (page 3.54)  
Sample cover page (page 3.22)  
Department time list (page 3.56)  
List of F-Code boxes (page 3.29)  
List of documents stored in F-Code boxes (page 3.29)  
Batch box list (page 3.12)  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than what appears  
on the LCD, press that key now.  
3.35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Option 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key.(For example, Do this at 5:05 PMtoday.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0,0 and then  
the time the fax should perform the command:  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which operation you want to program into the pro-  
grammable one-touch:  
4
Type :Communication  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.  
Press until Communication appears.  
Press ENTER,ENTER.The LCDasks if you want to make additional settings for this  
programmable one-touch number.  
5
6
7
10  
11  
Type :Communication  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Option  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.The LCDnow shows either:  
Ifyoudo not want to make additional settings, press ENTER.Then skip to step 24.  
Ifyoudo want to make additional settings, press and ENTER.  
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
9-5558743_  
or  
The LCDasks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-touch  
number.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should dial  
it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can be up  
to 40 characters in length:  
Resolution :------  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
9-5550629_  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
12  
13  
Note: For any of the following settings, choose ----- if you do not want to spec-  
ify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press toscroll to the leftor to scroll to the right.  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks you to select a contrast mode for each programmable  
one-touch number.  
Important: Do not press ENTER.  
Now,while you can still see the fax number on the LCD,press  
ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
8
9
Contrast  
:-------  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Delayed  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
Enter Time: 11/20:30  
14  
15  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want the memory transmission on or off when  
using this programmable one-touch number.  
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:  
Option 1:  
Perform the command onceatacertain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PMon the 30th. )  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date and  
time when the fax should perform the command:  
Memory Tx  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
16  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
3.36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Programming a broadcast / group  
Programming a broadcast is very similar to programming a delayed transmission. But  
instead of sending to just one phone number, you set up multiple numbers for the trans-  
mission.  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks you for the type of confirmation report you want to set  
for this programmable one-touch number.  
17  
Report  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
To program a broadcast / group into a programmable one-touch key:  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
Press Program key,A,3,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows the first empty programma-  
ble one-touch number available:  
18  
19  
1
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want to send a cover page for this programma-  
ble one-touch number.  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Cover Page  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: IfP2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a num-  
ber for P1.You can see what you programmed into P1 by pressing ,if  
you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling document,  
you will see:  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
20  
21  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or offfor  
this programmable one-touch number.  
Select Program No.  
P1:Polling Document  
Fax & Copy  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to  
enter.  
Note: When the memory transmission is set to offinstep 15, this LCDwillnot  
appear and go to step 24.  
Note: Toerase a programmable one-touch key,see page 3.48.  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P2.  
2
Press until the mode you want appears.  
22  
23  
24  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Press ENTER.  
Press STOPto return your machine to standby mode.  
Note: If you re changing a previously stored command: If your previous com-  
mand for this key was a for a broadcast/group transmission, and you  
want to keep this key programmed for a broadcast/group transmission,  
use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this  
key to a completely different operation for batch transmission, then you  
must first erase the stored command before programming the new one.  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than what appears  
on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which operation you want to program into the pro-  
grammable one-touch:  
4
Type :Communication  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.  
3.37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Option 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key.(For example, Do this at 5:05 PMtoday.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0,0 and then  
the time the fax should perform the command:  
Press until Communication appears.  
5
6
7
Type :Communication  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
Press ENTER.The LCDnow shows either:  
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
9-5558743_  
or  
Press ENTER,ENTER.  
10  
11  
The LCDasks if you want to make additional settings for this programmable one-  
touch number.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter up to 230 fax numbers you can use any com-  
bination of call groups, one-touch keys, speed-dial numbers and manually-dialed  
numbers.  
Option  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Important: Do not press ENTER.  
Press BROADCASTto enter a comma between each number or call group.  
Important: Do not insert a comma afterthe last number.  
Ifyoudo not want to make additional settings, press ENTER.Then skip to step 23.  
Ifyoudo want to make additional settings, press and ENTER.  
To enter a speed-dial number,press SPEEDDIAL/TELINDEXand the numbersthree-  
digitidentifier.  
To enter a call group, press GROUPDIAL and the group s identifier number.  
The LCDasks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-touch  
number.  
12  
Resolution :------  
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
G5,G7,[01],S006,9-55  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
13  
14  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press toscroll to the leftor to scroll to the right.  
Note: For any of the following settings, choose ----- if you do not want to spec-  
ify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.  
If you want the broadcast to begin immediately every time you press the key,  
press ENTERand skip to step 11.  
If you want to delay the broadcast, press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS,ENTER.  
8
9
Press ENTER.The LCDasks you to select a contrast mode for each programmable  
one-touch number.  
Contrast  
:-------  
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Option 1:  
Perform the command onceatacertain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PMon the 30th. )  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date and  
time when the fax should perform the command:  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
15  
16  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks you for the type of confirmation report you want to set  
for this programmable one-touch number.  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
Report  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
17  
3.38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Programming regular polling  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want to send a cover page for this programma-  
ble one-touch number.  
18  
To program a regular polling operation into a programmable one-touch key:  
Cover Page  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press Program key,A,3,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows the first empty programma-  
ble one-touch number available:  
1
Press until the mode you want appears.  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
19  
20  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or offfor  
this programmable one-touch number.  
Note: IfP2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a num-  
ber for P1.You can see what you programmed into P1 by pressing ,if  
you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling document,  
you will see:  
Fax & Copy  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
Press ENTER.  
Select Program No.  
P1:Polling Document  
21  
22  
23  
Press to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to  
enter.  
Press STOPto return your machine to standby mode.  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P2.  
2
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a polling transmission and  
you want to keep this key programmed for a polling transmission, use  
these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to  
a completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for exam-  
ple), then you first must erase the stored command before programming  
the new one.  
Note: Toerase a programmable one-touch key,see page 3.48.  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one that  
appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
4
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which operation you want to program into the pro-  
grammable one-touch:  
Type :Communication  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.  
Press until Communication appears.  
5
Type :Communication  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
3.39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Programming an F-Code transmission  
For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
Press ENTER.The LCDnow shows either:  
6
7
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
9-5558743_  
or  
You must know how the remote fax is using each F-Code box to which you re trans-  
mitting for example, as a security box or a relay box. Different fax manufacturers  
may use slightly different terms, but the concepts are the same.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should dial  
it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can be up  
to 40 characters in length:  
You must know the remote fax sITU-  
T
sub-address and password for each box to  
which you want to transmit.  
To program an F-Code transmission into a programmable one-touch key:  
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
9-5550696_  
Press Program key,A,3,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows the first empty programma-  
ble one-touch number available:  
1
Your display shows only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond those  
20, press toscroll to the leftor to scroll to the right.  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Important: Do not press ENTER.  
Note: IfP2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a num-  
ber for P1.You can see what you programmed into P1 by pressing ,if  
you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling document,  
you will see:  
Next, while you can still see the fax number on the LCD,press ADVANCEDFUNC-  
TIONStwice and then press ENTER.  
8
9
If you want the polling to begin immediately every time you press the key, press  
ENTERand skip to step 12.  
If you want to delay the polling, press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS,ENTER.  
Select Program No.  
P1:Polling Document  
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:  
10  
Press to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to  
enter.  
Option 1:  
Perform the command onceatacertain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PMon the 30th. )  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date and  
time when the fax should perform the command:  
Note: Toerase a programmable one-touch key,see page 3.48.  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P2.  
2
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Option 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key.(For example, Do this at 5:05 PMtoday.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0,0 and then  
the time the fax should perform the command:  
Note: If your previous command for this key was for an F-Code transmission  
and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code transmission,  
use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this  
key to a completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for  
example), then you first must erase the stored command before program-  
ming the new one.  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one that  
appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
Press ENTER,ENTER.  
11  
12  
Press STOPto return your machine to standby mode.  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which operation you want to program into the pro-  
grammable one-touch:  
4
Type :Communication  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
3.40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the key,  
press ENTERand skip to step 15.  
If you want to delay the transmission, press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS,ENTER.  
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.  
Press until Communication appears.  
12  
13  
5
6
7
Type :Communication  
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Option 1:  
Perform the command onceatacertain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PMon the 30th. )  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date and  
time when the fax should perform the command:  
Press ENTER.The LCDnow shows either:  
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
9-5558743_  
or  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should dial  
it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can be up  
to 40 characters in length:  
Option 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key.(For example, Do this at 5:05 PMtoday.)  
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
9-5550629_  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0,0 and then  
the time when the fax should perform the command:  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press toscroll to the leftor to scroll to the right.  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
Important: Do not press ENTER.  
Press ENTER,ENTER.  
14  
15  
Now,while you still can see the fax number on the LCD,press ADVANCED  
FUNCTIONSthree times and then press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
8
9
The LCDasks if you want to make additional settings for this programmable one-  
touch number.  
Enter Sub-Address  
_
Option  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the ITU- sub-address for the box to which you  
T
want to send the document. Here, we ve entered 123456:  
Ifyoudo not want to make additional settings, press ENTER.Skip to step 29.  
Ifyoudo want to make additional settings, press and ENTER.  
Enter Sub-Address  
123456_  
The LCDasks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-touch  
number.  
16  
17  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
10  
Resolution :------  
Enter Password  
_
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
Note: Ifthereisntapassword for this box, press ENTER,then skip to step 13.  
Note: For any of the following settings, choose ----- if you do not want to spec-  
ify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate ITU- password for the box.  
T
11  
Here, we ve entered 654321:  
Enter Password  
654321_  
When finished, press ENTER.  
3.41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Programming F-Code polling  
For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks you to select a contrast mode for each programmable  
one-touch number.  
18  
The document which you re polling must exist in the remote fax s F-Code box (ITU-  
standard sub-addressing/password box).  
T
Contrast  
:-------  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
You must know the remote fax sITU-  
T
sub-address and password (if any) for each  
box you want to poll.  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
19  
20  
To program an F-Code polling operating into a programmable one-touch key:  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want the memory transmission on or off when  
using this programmable one-touch number.  
Press Program key,A,3,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows the first empty programma-  
ble one-touch number available:  
1
Memory Tx  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
21  
22  
Note: IfP2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a num-  
ber for P1.You can see what you programmed into P1 by pressing ,if  
you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling document,  
you will see:  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks you for the type of confirmation report you want to set  
for this programmable one-touch number.  
Report  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Select Program No.  
P1:Polling Document  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
23  
24  
Press to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to  
enter.  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want to send a cover page for this programma-  
ble one-touch number.  
Note: Toerase a programmable one-touch key,see page 3.48.  
Cover Page  
:---  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P2.  
2
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
25  
26  
Note: If your previous command for this key was for an F-Code polling opera-  
tion and you want to keep this key programmed for an F-Code polling  
operation, use these instructions to make changes. But if you want to  
assign this key to a completely different operation (for a delayed trans-  
mission, for example), then you first must erase the stored command  
before programming the new one.  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or offfor  
this programmable one-touch number.  
Fax & Copy  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: When the memory transmission is set to offinstep 20, this LCDwillnot  
appear and go to step 29.  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one that  
appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
Press until the mode you want appears.  
27  
28  
29  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which operation you want to program into the pro-  
grammable one-touch:  
4
Press ENTER.  
Type :Communication  
Press STOPto return your machine to standby mode.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
3.42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the key,  
press ENTERand skip to step15.  
If you want to delay the transmission, press ADVANCEDFUNCTIONS,ENTER.  
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.  
Press until Communication appears.  
12  
13  
5
6
7
Type :Communication  
Next, tell your fax to carry out this delayed command one of these ways:  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Option 1:  
Perform the command onceatacertain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PMon the 30th. )  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date and  
time when the fax should perform the command:  
Press ENTER.The LCDnow shows either:  
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
_
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
9-5558743_  
or  
Delayed  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should dial  
it, including whatever codes your phone system requires. The number can be up  
to 40 characters in length:  
Enter Time: 30/17:05  
Option 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key.(For example, Do this at 5:05 PMtoday.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0,0 and then  
the time when the fax should perform the command:  
P2:Fax#/Advan.Func.  
9-5550629_  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20, press toscroll to the leftor to scroll to the right.  
Delayed  
Enter Time: 00/17:05  
Important: Do not press ENTER.  
Press ENTER,ENTER.  
14  
15  
Now,while you still can see the fax number on the LCD,press ADVANCED  
FUNCTIONSfour times and then press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
8
9
Press STOPto return your machine to standby mode.  
Enter Sub-Address  
_
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the ITU- sub-address for the box to which you  
want to send the document. Here, we ve entered 123456:  
T
Enter Sub-Address  
123456_  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
10  
Enter Password  
_
Note: Ifthereisntapassword for this box, press ENTER,then skip to step 14.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate ITU- password for the box.  
Here, we ve entered 654321:  
T
11  
Enter Password  
654321_  
When finished, press ENTER.  
3.43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Programming a batch transmission  
For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
Press until Communication appears.  
5
6
7
Type :Communication  
The batch box you re using must exist on your fax machine.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
You must know the batch box s identifier number (15).  
To program a batch transmission into a programmable one-touch key:  
Press ENTER,ADVANCEDFUNCTIONSfive times and then press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
Press Program key,A,3,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows the first empty programma-  
ble one-touch number available:  
Batch Tx  
Enter Box No.  
1
:_  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the one-digit identifier for the batch box you  
want to assign to this one-touch key. Here, we ve entered 5:  
Note: IfP2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a num-  
ber for P1.You can see what you programmed into P1 by pressing ,if  
you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling document,  
you will see:  
Batch Tx  
Enter Box No.  
:5  
Note: To change an identifier already entered, press CANCELtoeraseit. Then  
re-enter the correct identifier.  
Select Program No.  
P1:Polling Document  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want to make additional settings for this pro-  
grammable one-touch number.  
8
9
Press to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to  
enter.  
Option  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: Toerase a programmable one-touch key,see page 3.48.  
Ifyoudo not want to make additional settings, press ENTER.Skip to step 16.  
Ifyoudo want to make additional settings, press and ENTER.  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P2.  
2
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
The LCDasks which resolution you want to use for this programmable one-touch  
number.  
Note: If your previous command for this key was for a batch transmission and  
you want to keep this key programmed for a batch transmission, use  
these instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to  
a completely different operation (for a delayed transmission, for exam-  
ple), then you first must erase the stored command before programming  
the new one.  
Resolution :-----  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
10  
11  
Note: For any of the following settings, choose ----- if you do not want to spec-  
ify the displayed setting for this programmable one-touch key.  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one that  
appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
Press ENTER.The LCDasks you to select a contrast mode for each programmable  
one-touch number.  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which operation you want to program into the pro-  
grammable one-touch:  
4
Contrast  
:-------  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Type :Communication  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
12  
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.  
3.44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Programming printouts  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want to turn the Fax & Copy feature on or offfor  
this programmable one-touch number.  
13  
To program a programmable one-touch key to print a list:  
Fax & Copy  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press Program key,A,3,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows the first empty programma-  
ble one-touch number available:  
1
Press until the mode you want appears.  
Press ENTER.  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
14  
15  
16  
Note: IfP2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a num-  
ber for P1.You can see what you programmed into P1 by pressing ,if  
you want. For example, if you set P1 for printing a list of the machine set-  
tings, you will see:  
Press STOPto return your machine to standby mode.  
Select Program No.  
P1:Machine Settings  
Press to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to  
enter.  
Note: Toerase a programmable one-touch key,see page 3.48.  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P2.  
2
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Note: If your previous command for this key was for printing a list and you want  
to keep this key programmed for printing a list, use these instructions to  
make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a completely different  
operation (for a delayed transmission, for example), then you first must  
erase the stored command before programming the new one.  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one that  
appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
4
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which operation you want to program into the pro-  
grammable one-touch:  
Type :Communication  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.  
Press until List Print appears.  
5
Type :List Print  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
3.45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Programming a document storage operation  
If you want to program a programmable one-touch key to store an F-Code polling docu-  
ment, two things must be true:  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which list you want to program into the programmable  
one-touch:  
6
P2:Machine Settings  
The F-Code bulletin box must exist on your fax machine.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
You must know the F-Code bulletin box s two-digit number (01-50) and name.  
Press until the list you want appears.  
Press ENTER.  
To program your programmable one-touch to store a regular polling document or  
F-Code polling document:  
7
8
9
Press Program key,A,3,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows the first empty programma-  
ble one-touch number available:  
1
Press STOPto return your machine to standby mode.  
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Note: IfP2 appears on the LCD, it means that you have already entered a num-  
ber for P1.You can see what you programmed into P1 by pressing ,if  
you want. For example, if you set P1 for storing of the polling document,  
you will see:  
Select Program No.  
P1:Polling Document  
Press to go back to the programmable one-touch key you want to  
enter.  
Note: Toerase a programmable one-touch key,see page 3.48.  
Press the key that you want to program or change. Here, we ve selected P2.  
2
Select Program No.  
P2:No Number Stored  
Note: If your previous command for this key was to store a document and you  
want to keep this key programmed to store a document, use these  
instructions to make changes. But if you want to assign this key to a com-  
pletelydifferent operation (for a delayed transmission, for example), then  
you first must erase the stored command before programming the new  
one.  
If you want to select a different programmable one-touch key than the one that  
appears on the LCD, press that key now.  
3
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which operation you want to program into the pro-  
grammable one-touch:  
4
Type :Communication  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: If changing a previously stored command, skip to step 7.  
3.46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
The LCDasks if you want to program additional settings for this one-touch.  
Press until Store Document appears.  
5
6
14  
15  
Type :Store Document  
Option  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which storing menu you want to program into the pro-  
grammable one-touch:  
Ifyoudo not want to program additional settings, press ENTER.Go to step 22.  
Ifyoudo want to program additional settings, press and ENTER,then go on to  
step 15.  
P2:Polling Document  
The LCDasks which resolution you want each time you use this programmable  
one-touch number.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
Resolution :------  
7
8
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.  
If you select the Polling Document operation, skip to step 14.  
If you select the F-Code Document operation, go on to step 9.  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
16  
17  
Note: For any of the following settings, choosing --- tells the machine to use  
tisdefault setting for this programmable one-touch key.  
The LCDasks which F-Code bulletin box you want to use.  
9
Select F-Code Box  
01:Murata Machinery  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks which contrast mode you want each time you use this  
programmable one-touch number.  
Contrast  
:-------  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the two-digit identifier number (01-50)ofthe F-  
Code box in which you want to store the document. Here, we ve entered 0,3:  
10  
Select F-Code Box  
03:Muratec America  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
18  
19  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want the Fax & Copy feature on or off each time  
you use this programmable one-touch number.  
To select a different F-Code box than the one that appears on the LCD, enter that  
box number now.  
11  
12  
Fax & Copy  
:---  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks if you want the box to overwrite (erase) any docu-  
mentsitiscurrently storing whenever it stores a new document.  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
Press ENTER.  
Overwrite Doc. :Off  
20  
21  
22  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
On: When your machine stores a new document into this box, it will overwrite  
documentsstoredinit.  
Press STOPto return your machine to standby mode.  
Of:f When your machine stores a new document into this box, it won t erase  
(overwrite) any documentsstoredinit. Your machine can store up to 30  
documents in each box (each document can include one or more pages).  
Press until the mode you want appears.  
Then press ENTERto save the setting.  
13  
3.47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Fax dialing with programmable one-touch  
Erasing a programmable one-touch key  
To dial a fax call using a programmable one-touch number:  
Press Program key,A,3,0,2,ENTER.The LCDshows the first programmable one-  
touch number that has been programmed:  
1
Set your document in the ADFor on the FBSglass.  
1
2
3
Select Program No.  
P1:Delayed  
Make any necessary adjustmentsasusual.  
If you are using the FBSglass, set the document size by pressing DOCUMENTSIZE  
before you press the programmable one-touch key.  
Note: IfP2 appears, it means P1 is empty.  
Press the programmable one-touch key you want to erase. Here, we ve selected  
P2:  
2
Press the programmable one-touch key in which you ve stored the fax communi-  
cation command.  
4
Select Program No.  
P2:Polling  
Your fax will perform the operation now, or at whatever time you programmed.  
Note: To review the details of each operation, review the instructions for that opera-  
tion. See page 3.35 for a list of each operation and where to find it.  
If you programmed this key to delay its operation, the LCDshows:  
To erase a different programmable one-touch key than the one that appears on  
the LCD, press that key now.  
3
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
4
** Reserved **  
Jun 29 2002 17:17  
P2:Erase P One-Touch  
Check Enter/Cancel  
If you programmed this key to perform the operation immediately after you press it, the  
LCDshows the number:  
Important: If you want to quit without erasing the programmable one-touch  
key you ve selected, press CANCEL.The fax will return to step 2.  
9-1-972-555-4335  
A4 Normal  
Press ENTERto erase the number.  
5
Erase P One-Touch  
** Complete **  
To erase another programmable one-touch key, repeat steps 2 5. Or press STOPto  
return to standby mode.  
Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys  
You fax machine can print a list of the commands you ve stored in your programmable  
one-touch keys.  
The list includes:  
(1) each key s one-touch number  
(2) the fax/telephone number  
(3) when the command should start  
(4) which command you ve selected  
(5) if applicable, the selected call group(s) or F-Code box(es) you ve stored in  
the key  
(6) the individual settings for each key  
To print a list of programmable one-touch keys, press Program key,E,1,0,8,ENTER.  
3.48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Security features  
Your machine has a number of security features to keep your private fax documentspri-  
vate, avoid unwanted outside communication and even protect against unauthorized  
use of your machine.  
Security reception  
Security reception tells your machine to keep all received faxes in memory (but not print  
them). Then you can print them out later, at your convenience. For example, you could  
use this if you re concerned about workers reading documents intended for your eyes  
only.  
These security features include:  
(1) Security reception, (2) PIN mask, (3) Block junk fax, and (4) Department codes.  
Important: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-  
tion as described on left column.You must also knowthe passcode.  
The passcode  
Your machine has a passcode protection system which must be turned on in order to  
use the security features listed below:  
Note: In the following instructions, your machine sLCDshortens the word  
Transmission toTx and the word Receive toRx.  
• Security reception  
• PIN mask  
• Department code protection  
To set your machine spasscode:  
Activating security reception  
Press Program key,B,2,1,1,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Security Rx  
Enter Passcode :****  
Decide on the four-digit passcode (0001 9999)you want to use. Write it down,  
and put it in a safe place.  
1
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the protection passcode.  
Here, we ve entered 6296:  
2
Important: Do not use 0000. This turns offpasscode protection.  
Press Program key,B,1,0,2,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
Security Rx  
2
Enter Passcode :6296  
Protect Passcode  
Old Passcode :****  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
3
If you are creating a passcode, use the numeric keypadtoenter 0000.  
If you are changing an existing passcode, enter the existing passcode.  
Security Rx  
:Off  
3
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.  
4
5
Press or until the setting you want appears.  
Here, we ve chosen On.  
4
5
Enter the new four-digit passcode. Here, we ve entered 6296:  
Security Rx  
:On  
Protect Passcode  
New Passcode :6296  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows the machine scurrent clock setting:  
Press ENTERto save the passcode.  
6
Security Rx  
Enter Time:  
Note: Any time you want to turn offthepasscode, change the passcode back to 0000  
by repeating steps 2 6 and entering 0000instep 5.  
15:42  
3.49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Printing from security reception / Turning off security reception  
When security reception is on, an incoming fax goes directly into your machine s mem-  
ory and the MEMORY RECEIVElight comes on. But the incoming fax message is not  
printed.  
If you want security reception to begin now (and at this same time every day),  
skip to step 8.  
Otherwise, go on to step 7.  
6
7
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time (use a 24-hour format) when security  
reception should begin every day. Type over the numbers displayed. Here,  
we ve entered 17:35:  
To retrieve the faxes received during this security reception (and to return your machine  
to normal reception until the next time):  
Press Program key,D,3,0,4,ENTER  
If you using the Softkey, press the Soft key instead of this operation.  
In which way,theLCDshows:  
Security Rx  
Enter Time:  
1
17:35  
To change a digit, press to move to the left,or to move right. Then enter the  
correct digit.  
Security Rx Doc.  
Enter Passcode :****  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
8
Use the numeric keypadtoenterthe passcode. Here we ve entered 6296:  
2
Helpfultip: After setting for activating the security reception, you can assign the  
security reception to the Soft key (see page 3.16) to turn it on and of.f  
Turning on the security reception by pressing a Softkey is not effected  
the time setting you entered at step 7. It begins the security reception  
immediately.  
Security Rx Doc.  
Enter Passcode :6296  
Press ENTER.  
3
If you ve entered the correct passcode, your fax machine will print all docu-  
mentsinits memory and then erase them. Then it will turn security reception  
off until the next time you ve scheduled security reception or the Softkey  
which programmed security reception is pressed.  
To turn the security reception on by pressing a softkey:  
Program a Softkey for security reception. (See page 3.16.)  
1
2
If you using the Softkey,theLEDlight of the Soft key will be of.f  
Press a Soft key that is assigned for security reception.  
If you ve entered an incorrect passcode, your fax machine will refuse to print,  
and security reception remains on.  
Enter Passcode :****  
Enter the protection passcode and then press ENTER.  
The LCDbriefly shows following and the LEDof the Soft key will light and the secu-  
rity reception begins immediately.  
3
** Sec. Rx Active **  
Note: To turn the security reception off,see Printing from security reception/Turning  
off security reception, next column.  
3.50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Press or until the mode you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen  
Masking the PIN  
4
5
Mode1.  
To prevent unauthorized long-distance calls, some office telephone systems require you  
toentera personal identification number (PIN)whenever you dial long distance.  
PIN Mode  
:Mode1  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Your fax s PIN mask feature helps you keep that PIN number private. WiththePIN mask  
activated, you can dial a fax number plus a PIN, but the PIN will not appear in a journal,  
error message printout, delayed command list or a TCR.The PIN may be up to eight  
characters in length. It also can include the *or# symbols, and it can be entered from  
the numeric keypad.  
Press ENTER.  
Autodialing while using the PIN mask  
Note: The following instructions presume you understand how to set and use your  
machine sautodialer. If you need to review, see pages 3.1 3.8.  
There are three possible settings for the PIN mask:  
Off Turns offthePIN mask feature. Any PIN you enter will appear on any display or  
printout which shows the number you dial.  
If you chose Mode 1 the PIN goes in  
Mode 1 Each remote fax unit has a departmentalPIN access code.  
Mode 2 Each fax user has a departmentalPIN access code.  
In Mode 1, before autodialing a number for the first time, you must add the PIN to the  
stored one-touch key or speed-dial number.Here s how:  
Note: If you select Mode 1 and you will use a one-touch or speed-dial number, you  
must store the remote unit sPIN access code within that number. However,if  
you select Mode 2, this isn t necessary. (See Autodialing while using the PIN  
mask, next column for further details.)  
Begin by creating or changing an entry in the autodialer. See pages 3.1 3.8 if  
necessary. While you re setting this up, the machine asks you to enter the PIN.  
The LCDshows:  
1
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission (see  
pages 3.11 3.13), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit within  
the appropriate batch box.  
Set PIN Number  
Enter Passcode :****  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the four-digit passcode. Here, we ll use our  
sample passcode again.  
2
Activating the PIN mask  
Important: For this feature to work, you must have activated the passcode protec-  
tion as described on page 3.49. You must also knowthe passcode.  
Set PIN Number  
Enter Passcode :6296  
Press Program key,B,2,1,2,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Press ENTER.In our example, we re setting speed-dial number 001:  
3
PIN Mode  
Enter Passcode :****  
001:PIN Number  
_
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the four-digit passcode. Here, we ve entered  
6296.  
2
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the desired PIN, up to eight characters in length.  
4
001:PIN Number  
1057_  
PIN Mode  
Enter Passcode :6296  
Press ENTERto save the PIN.  
Note: Ifyou enter an invalid passcode, the machine ssecurity feature rejects the  
attempt and returns to standby mode.  
5
Note: If you press ENTERwithout entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,indi-  
cates Invalid Number on the LCDand then returns to step 4.  
Press ENTER.  
3
Now you may autodial the number as usual.  
PIN Mode  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
3.51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Important: While in PIN Mode 1, any autodialer numbers you use must include the  
If you ve specified Mode 2 the machine guides you  
PIN.This also applies to autodialer numbers used with batch transmission  
(see page 3.11) or programmable one-touch keys (see pages 3.35 3.48).  
Enter the phone number as usual.  
1
Press Start  
19725550911_  
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission, you  
must store the PIN access code for the remote unit within the appropriate batch  
box.  
Press START.The LCDshows:  
2
Enter PIN Number  
_
If you chose Mode 2 as you autodial, load the code  
In this mode, you dont have to add the PIN to the autodialer setting. Instead, you enter  
the PIN manually each time you autodial:  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the PIN.  
3
Dial the number as you normally would, using the autodialer. Here, we ve pushed  
one-touch key A.The machine now asks for the PIN:  
Enter PIN Number  
123456_  
1
Enter PIN Number  
_
Press START.Your machine dials the number.  
4
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the PIN.  
Performing batch transmission while using the PIN mask  
2
Enter PIN Number  
1057_  
Note: The following instructions presume you are familiar with how to set and use  
both your machine sautodialer and its batch transmission feature. If you need  
to review, see pages 3.1 3.8 for more on the autodialer and/or page 3.11for  
more on batch transmission.  
Press START.Your machine dials the number.  
3
If you ve specified Mode 1 or Mode 2  
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission (see  
page 3.11), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit within the  
appropriate batch box.  
Important: Any autodialer number you use with batch transmission mustinclude the  
PIN.(To review how to include this information in an autodialer number,  
review the Mode 1 instructions under Autodialing while using the PIN  
mask, page 3.51.)  
Dialing from the numeric keypad while using the PIN mask  
Before sending a batch transmission the first time, you must store the PIN withinits  
batch box.Here s how:  
If you ve specified Mode 1 use star power  
Enter the phone number, then press the *(star ) key and enter the PIN.  
1
Follow the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (pages 3.11 3.12).  
The PIN always goes last. For example, to dial 19725550911with a PIN of 123456 ,  
1
The LCDasks for the fax number (here, we re working with batch box 1):  
enter 19725550911*123456:  
1:Fax Number  
_
Press Start  
19725550911*123456_  
Enter an autodialer number, or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number,  
to which the batch transmission should go.  
Press START.The PIN disappears from the display, and your machine dials the  
desired phone number.  
2
2
Important: If you re entering a number from the numeric keypad, enter the fax  
number,followed by the *(star ) key and then the PIN.  
3.52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Setting Block Junk Fax  
Your fax machine sBlock Junk Fax feature lets you bar the gates against unauthorized  
incoming faxes ( junk fax ). But before you block junk fax, first understand how this fea-  
ture works, to determine if it sright for you. There are four possible settings for Block  
Junk Fax:  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
4
Note: If you press ENTERwithout entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,indi-  
cates No PIN Number on the LCDand then returns you to step 2.  
Continue with the steps for creating or modifying a batch box (pages 3.11 3.12).  
Off The feature isn t activated.  
Now you can perform batch transmission to this box while the PIN mask is activated.  
Mode1 Your fax machine checks whether the last four digits of any phone number  
in your autodialer matches the last four digits of the remote fax s subscriber ID (the  
phone number partofthe TTI). If it doesn t find a match, your machine disconnects  
thecall.  
Mode2 This mode rejects any call from a number whose last eight digits match  
any number in the blocked numbers list (explained later). Your machine can hold up  
to 50 blocked numbers.  
Mode3 This rejects numbers that are not in the autodialer and also rejects numbers  
thatare in the blocked numbers list. This lets you keep a number on your autodialer  
for transmission to it, while still blocking its incoming calls by putting it in the blocked  
numbers list.  
But before you activate the Block Junk Fax feature, please consider:  
Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs.  
W ith Block Junk Fax activated, your machine would reject faxes from these  
machines.  
Access codes can cause confusion. If an autodialer entry ends with extra codes,  
such as long-distance codes, Block Junk Fax will block out calls from those faxes.  
To set Block Junk Fax:  
Press Program key,B,2,1,0,ENTER.The LCDshows your fax scurrent setting:  
1
Block Junk Fax:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Here, we ve chosen Mode2.  
2
Block Junk Fax:Mode2  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
What you do next depends on what you selected in step 1:  
3
If you selected Off orMode1,press STOPto return to standby mode.  
If you selected either Mode2orMode3, go on to step 4.  
3.53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Clearing a number from the blocked numbers list  
Toclear a number from the list:  
Depending on if you have already entered at least one number into the blocked  
numbers list, the LCDshows one of the following:  
4
5
Press Program key,B,2,1,0,ENTER.  
If your Block Junk Fax setting is either Mode2orMode3,skip to step 3.  
Enter Fax Number  
01:_  
Select BlockJunk No.  
01:555-2971  
1
or  
Block Junk Fax:Off  
If you want to modify an existing entry in the blocked numbers list, press or  
until you see the number you want to modify.  
or  
If you want to enter a new number in an already-started blocked numbers list,  
press or until you find an empty position in the list.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until you see your preference, Mode2orMode3.  
2
Block Junk Fax:Mode2  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Then press ENTERto enter or modify the blocked number.  
Note: Toclear a number from the list, see Clearing a number from the blocked  
numbers list, right column.  
Press ENTER.The LCDshows:  
3
Select BlockJunk No.  
01:555-2971  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the last eight characters of a fax number you  
want to block. For example, if you want to block a fax from someone with a  
Subscriber ID of972-555-3038, you should enter 5,5,5, DIALING OPTIONS,3,0,3,  
8:  
6
Press or until you see the number you want to clear.  
4
5
Press CANCELto clear the number.  
To clear another number from the blocked numbers list, repeat steps 4 5.  
Otherwise, go on to step 6.  
Enter Fax Number  
01:555-3038_  
To change a specific digit, press to move leftor to move right until the cur-  
sor is under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct number.  
Press STOPto return your machine to standby mode.  
6
Press ENTERto save the setting. The LCDshows the next slot in the blocked  
numbers list.  
Ifyoudo not want to enter or change a number for this slot, go on to step 8.  
Ifyoudo want to enter or change a number for this slot, repeat steps 5 7.  
7
8
Printing a list of the blocked numbers  
Forgot which number is stored in the blocked number list? Just print a list of the blocked  
numbers.  
Press STOP.Your machine will return to standby mode.  
To print a list of the blocked numbers, press Program key,E,1,1,0,ENTER.  
3.54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Clearing a department code  
Using department codes  
You can keep track of how your machine is used through itsdepartment code feature.  
When the department code setting is activated, the machine reminds each user to enter  
the department code before sending or polling a document. The Activity Journal then  
keepstrack of fax transactions by department.  
Press Program key,C,3,0,2,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Select Department No  
001:1555  
After you turn on this setting, assign specific code numbers to your office s fax users  
and tell them to enter these department codes before sending faxes.  
Note: Ifdepartment code operation is protected (see next page), the fax beeps  
briefly and then returns to standby mode. Youwill have to turn off the pro-  
tection first, then repeat this step.  
Note: Please note that using this setting may block access to the fax machine.  
Press or until you see the code you want to clear. Here, we ve selected  
3111.  
2
3
Entering a department code  
Your machine can hold up to 100 separate department codes.  
Select Department No  
005:3111  
To enter a department code:  
Press Program key,C,3,0,2,ENTER.Depending upon whether you ve already  
entered a department code, the LCDshows:  
1
Press CANCEL.The LCDshows:  
3111:Erase Dpt. Code  
Check Enter/Cancel  
Enter Dept. Code  
001:_  
Select Department No  
001:1555  
or  
Note: If you want to quit without erasing the department code you ve selected,  
press CANCEL.The machine will return to step 2.  
Note: Ifdepartment code operation is protected (see page 3.56), the fax beeps  
briefly and then returns to standby mode. Youwill have to turn off the pro-  
tection first, then repeat this step.  
Press ENTER.The code you selected will be cleared.  
To clear another department code, repeat steps 2 3.  
Ifyoudont want to clear another department code, press STOPto return to  
standby mode.  
4
If you have not entered any codes in your fax, skip to step 4.  
Otherwise, go on to step 3.  
2
3
To enter a new code in a department code list that s already been started, press  
ENTER.The fax will skip to the next empty position in the list.  
Turning the department code setting on and off  
Note: If you want to modify an existing entry in the department code, you first  
clear a department code you want to modify and then enter a new code  
(see Clearing a department code, right column).  
Press Program key,C,3,0,3,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Dept. Setting :Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the four-digit department code, 0000 9999.  
Here, we ve entered 1555:  
4
5
Note: Ifdepartment code operation is protected (see next page), the fax beeps  
briefly and then returns to standby mode. Youwill have to turn off the pro-  
tection first, then repeat this step.  
Enter Dept. Code  
001:1555  
Important: To turn the department code setting on, at least one department  
code must be existed in your machine.  
To change one digit, press to move leftor to move right until the cursor is  
under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct number.  
Press or until you see the setting you want.  
2
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
To enter another department code, repeat steps 4 5.  
To stop entering department codes, press STOPto return to standby mode.  
Dept. Setting :On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTER.  
3
3.55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
Turning department code protection on and off  
Press START.  
4
5
Important: This feature will work only if you ve activated the passcode protection  
(see page 3.49).  
Enter Dept. Code  
_
Press Program key,C,3,0,1,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Use the numeric keypad toenter the appropriate four-digit department code. In  
this example, we ve entered 3111:  
Set Dept. Protect  
Enter Passcode: ****  
Enter Dept. Code  
3111_  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the four-digit passcode:  
2
Set Dept. Protect  
Enter Passcode: 6296  
Press STARTagain.  
6
Printing the department time list  
To change one digit, press to move leftor to move right until the cursor is  
under the digit, then use the numeric keypad to enter the correct number.  
To print the list, press Program key,E,1,1,2,ENTER.  
Press ENTER.  
3
Note: Ifdepartment code operation is protected (see left column), the fax beepsbriefly  
and then returns to standby mode. Youwill have to turn offtheprotection first,  
then repeat the above.  
Dept. Protect :Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
The department time list includes the following information for each department code:  
Time period covered by the department time list  
Each department code  
Press or until the setting you want appears.  
4
Dept. Protect :On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Total communication time (in hours, minutes and seconds; HH:M M:SS) Countsthe  
communication time up to 999:59:59 (999 hours:59 minutes:59 seconds). If the fax  
exceeds the maximum time, it does not count further.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
5
Total printed pages Countsthe pages up to 65535 pages. If the fax exceeds the  
maximum number of pages, it countsthetotalpages from 0 (zero).  
Sending a fax using a department code  
For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
The four-digit department code must exist on your fax machine.  
You must know the department code.  
Note: If you want to clear the total counts of each department code, see Clearing the  
current department time list , below.  
Clearing the department time list  
To clear the current total counts of each department code:  
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Press Program key,C,3,0,4,ENTER,ENTER.  
Enter the fax number by either pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-dial  
The total communication time and totalprinted pages for each department code are  
cleared. The department code will not be erased.  
number or dialing from the numeric keypad.  
If you enter the fax number using a one-touch key,skip to step 5.  
Otherwise, go on to step 4.  
3.56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced features  
This page intentionally blank.  
3.57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
This chapter describes  
how to change the settings of your  
machine.  
Settings for transmission ...............................................4.1  
Settings for reception ..................................................4.3  
Settings for dialing ....................................................4.5  
Settings for copying ...................................................4.6  
Settings for operation ..................................................4.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Settings for transmission  
By following the steps above, you ve set your defaults for scanning. Before sending doc-  
uments,you can override these default scan settings for that transmission.  
Scan settings  
Default setting: Primary resolution: Normal, Primary contrast: Normal  
Tooverride the default resolution and contrast settings before sending a document:  
Press RESOLUTIONto change the resolution.  
Twodifferent settings tell your machine how to scan documents.The initial factory set-  
tings are probably right for most applications, so try using them before changing any of  
these settings:  
Press CONTRASTto change the contrast.  
Once your document is transmitted, your machine returns to itsdefault settings.  
Primary resolution mode Setsthe resolution for your documents. Choose either  
normal, fine, superfine ( S Fine on the LCD) or grayscale mode ( Gray ).  
Primary contrast mode Setshow light or dark you want faxed documentstobe  
when they arrive at their destinations.  
Setting ECM  
Default setting: On  
Note: The primary settings you choose effect your fax activity only.  
To set these modes:  
Line noise, orstatic on the line during a call, can easily disrupt the flow of data from  
one fax machine to another.  
Press Program key,B,2,0,1,ENTER.The LCDasks you to select a resolution:  
1
That s why your fax machine gives you the option of using Error Correction Mode (ECM).  
When two fax machines communicate while running in ECM, the sending machine auto-  
matically checks the data as it sends. If the receiving fax machine can t verify the  
transmission, the first machine will re-send it as necessary.  
Resolution :Normal  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen  
fine resolution.  
2
Note: ECMgives you a better chance of transmitting a fax document over a bad phone  
line, but it could also slow down the transmission time. And the worse the line  
is, the slower the transmission. That s why the machine letsyou turn ECMon or  
off as needed.  
Resolution :Fine  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: Not all fax machines have ECM.If you ve activated ECMand then transmit to a  
fax machine not currently using ECM, there will be no change in the fax transmis-  
sion from a usual, non-ECMtransmission.  
Press ENTERto save the setting. The LCDasks you to select a contrast setting:  
3
Contrast  
:Normal  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press Program key,B,2,0,9,ENTER.The LCDshows the current ECMsetting:  
1
Press or until the mode you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen  
light contrast.  
ECM Mode  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
4
5
Contrast  
:Light  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen Off.  
2
3
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
ECM Mode  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
4.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Memory transmission  
Default setting: On  
TTI transmission  
Default setting: On  
Every fax page you send arrives at the receiving machine with a single line of text at the  
very top of the page. Thistextlists a name, called the Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI),  
and a fax number.You can set the machine to not send the TTI.  
Note: When the machine s memory is full, it can transmit only through the document  
feeder (real time transmission).  
Note: When you use the FBSglass, the machine always uses memory transmission  
even if you set the memory transmission to of.f  
Press Program key,B,2,0,8,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
TTI Tx  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
To change the default setting of memory transmission:  
Press Program key,B,2,0,6,ENTER.  
1
Press or until the setting you want appears. In this example, we ve  
chosen Off.  
Memory Tx  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
2
3
TTI Tx  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen Of.f  
2
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
Memory Tx  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
Quick Memory transmission  
Default setting: On  
Important: Your fax machine s memory transmission feature must be turned on to  
use Quick Memory transmission (see above).  
To change the default setting of Quick Memory transmission:  
Press Program key,B,2,0,7,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Quick Tx  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Here, we ve chosen Off.  
2
3
Quick Tx  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
4.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Settings for reception  
Half-page reception  
Print settings  
Half-page reception can conserve paper if some of the faxes you receive are half-page,  
memo-sized messages. When activated, this feature tells the machine to combine two  
of these half-page receptions onto a single sheet. Half-page reception only combines  
half-page messages sent back-to-back during the same transmission. It won t combine  
two half-page faxes from separate transmissions.  
You can set three parameters for printing received fax messages:  
Print reduction rate  
Reduction margin  
Paper save function  
You set all three in the same procedure, discussed on next page. Following is a expla-  
nation for each:  
To adjust the print settings  
Default setting: Rx reduction rate:Auto, Reduction margin: 40 mm,  
Half-page reception: Off  
Print reduction rate  
Print reduction lets you set the machine to reduce large incoming documentstoasize  
thatfits the paper in your machine. (This setting doesn t affect copies you may make  
with your machine.)  
Press Program key,B,2,0,2,ENTER.The LCDshows the current print  
reduction rate:  
1
Rx Reduc.Rate :Auto  
Below are the options for the print reduction rate for fax reception:  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Setting What it does  
Press or until the reduction setting you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen 100%.  
2
Automatically reduces printouts at variable rates down to a  
minimum of 50%. Triestoreduce printout to fit on one sheet of  
your selected paper size. If it can t, print the image at 100% size  
on two or more pages.  
Rx Reduc.Rate :100%  
Auto  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting. The LCDshows the current reduction margin:  
Does not reduce documents. (Due to the sender sTTI, this may print  
100%  
3
two pages when receiving a one-page fax document.)  
Margin  
(00-85mm):40  
Reduction margin  
Your machine sreduction margin is measured in millimeters (mm). Welldefinereduc-  
tion margin by explaining how it s used:  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the reduction margin you want. If  
necessary,press or to move the cursor. In this example, we ve chosen  
38mm.  
4
When a fax message enters your machine s electronic brain, the machine measures the  
message s length and comparesitto(a) the length of your selected paper (not include  
the print margins) plus (b) the reduction margin you set. If the length of the incoming  
message is shorter than (a) and (b)put together, your machine prints the message on  
just one sheet.  
Margin  
(00-85mm):38  
Press ENTERto save the setting. The LCDshows the current setting for  
half-page reception:  
5
Ifits longer, your machine prints the message on more than one sheet.  
Note: An Auto reduction setting and a reduction margin setting of 40mmwillprint  
most incoming faxes as single pages. Try this combination first and then, only if  
you have problems with it, select different settings.  
Half Page Recpt.:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
4.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Image Rotation  
Press or until the setting you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen  
On.  
6
7
Default setting: Off  
Half Page Recpt.:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: This feature is available only for the MFX-1700 model.  
When this feature is activated, incoming fax messages will be rotated automatically to fit  
on the paper.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
8.5"  
Your  
11"  
Fax  
Machine  
Setting the number of rings  
Default setting: 2 times  
11"  
You can set how many times your fax machine will ring before answering a call. Choose  
from 1 to 9 rings.  
8.5"  
A
Press Program key,B,2,0,3,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Press Program key,B,2,1,4,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
2
# Of Rings  
#
(1-9):2  
Rotate Rx  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Use the numeric keypadtoenter the number of rings you want, from 1 to 9. Here,  
we ve chosen 4 rings.  
2
Press or until the setting you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen  
On.  
# Of Rings  
#
(1-9):4  
Rotate Rx  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: If you enter the number except 1-9, the machine will beep briefly to warn  
you that it can t accept that setting.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
4.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Settings for dialing  
Changing the dialing pause length  
Default setting: 2 seconds  
Changing redial settings  
Default setting: Number of redial: 2 times, Redial interval: 1 minute  
Its up to you how many times the fax redials a number and how long it waits between  
redials (that length of time between calls is the redial interval).  
To program the redial settings:  
The pause is set by the factory to last two seconds, but you can set it to last as long as  
ten seconds if necessary.To change the pause length:  
Press Program key,B,2,0,5,ENTER.  
1
Press Program key,B,2,0,4,ENTER.  
1
Dialing Pause  
# Of Redials  
Time  
(02-10):02  
#
(02-15):02  
Use the numeric keypad toenter the length you want for the dialing pause. Here,  
we ve chosen nine seconds.  
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of redials you want. Choose from 2  
to 15 redials. In this example, we ve entered 03.  
2
Dialing Pause  
# Of Redials  
Time  
(02-10):09  
#
(02-15):03  
Note: The length setting requires two digits.Always enter a leading zero for  
lengths less than 10 seconds.  
Note: Enter a leading zero when entering a quantity less than 10.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
4
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
The LCDnow shows:  
Redial Interval  
Interval  
(1-5):1  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the length you want between redial attempts.  
Choose from 1 to 5 minutes.In this example, we ve chosen 4.  
5
6
Redial Interval  
Interval  
(1-5):4  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
4.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Settings for copying  
By following the steps above, you ve set your defaults for scanning. Before copying doc-  
uments,you can override these default scan settings for that copying.  
Copy scan settings  
Default setting: Primary document type: Text, Primary contrast: Normal  
Tooverride the default document type and contrast settings before copying a document:  
Press DOCUMENTto change the document type.  
Twodifferent settings tell your machine how to scan documents.The initial factory set-  
tings are probably right for most applications, so try using them before changing any of  
these settings:  
Press CONTRASTto change the contrast.  
Once your document is copied, your machine returns to itsdefault settings.  
Primary document type Sets the document type for your documents. Choose  
either Text,Text&Photo, or Photo.  
Primary contrast Sets how light or dark you want copied documentstobe.  
Adjusting the copy print settings  
Note: These primary settings you choose effect your copy activity only.  
To set these modes:  
Default setting: Margin: 24 mm  
Your machine sprint margin for copying is measured in millimeters (mm). Welldefine  
print margin by explaining how it s used:  
Press Program key,B,3,0,1,ENTER.The LCDasks you to select a resolution:  
1
When an original document is scanned, the machine measures the document slength  
and comparesitto(a) the length of your selected paper (not include the print margins)  
plus (b) the print margin you set. If the length of the document is longer than (a) and (b)  
put together, your machine prints the document on more than one sheet.  
Doc. Type:Text  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen  
PHOTO.  
2
Note: A print margin setting of 24 mm will print most documents as single pages. Try  
this combination first and then, only if you have problems with it, select different  
settings.  
Doc. Type:Photo  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press Program key,B,3,0,2,ENTER.The LCDshows the current print margin for  
copying:  
1
Press ENTERto save the setting. The LCDasks you to select a contrast setting:  
3
Contrast  
:Normal  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Margin  
(00-85mm):24  
Press or until the mode you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen  
light contrast.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the print margin you want. If necessary,press  
or to move the cursor. In this example, we ve chosen 20mm.  
4
5
2
Contrast  
:Light  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Margin  
(00-85mm):20  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
4.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Changing the copy auto reset time  
Default setting: 3 minutes  
Setting sort copy  
Default setting: On  
The machine returns to itsinitial condition automatically after a certain period of time.  
You can change this time from 1 to 10 minutes.  
You can set the sort setting to off for default setting by following procedure.  
Press Program key,B,3,0,6,ENTER.  
1
Press Program key,B,3,0,3,ENTER.  
1
Sort Copy  
:On  
Auto Reset Time  
(01-10):03  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the setting you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen Off.  
2
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time you want for the copy auto reset. Here,  
we ve chosen ten minutes.  
2
Sort Copy  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Auto Reset Time  
(01-10):10  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
Note: Enter a leading zero when entering a quantity less than 10.  
Helpful Tip: You can override the setting of sort copy just by pressing SORTbefore you  
press STARTto make copies.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
Setting copy auto  
Default setting: Auto is set for Recording paper size  
Setting Negative/Positive  
Default setting: Off  
The machine automatically selects the recording paper size according to the document  
size and enlargement/reduction rate. You can change it to select the document size or  
enlargement/reduction rate automatically, instead of the recording paper size.  
If you frequently use the Negative/Positive (reversing black and white areas), you can  
set it to on for default setting by following procedure.  
Press Program key,B,3,0,7,ENTER.  
1
Press Program key,B,3,0,4,ENTER.The LCDasks you to select the item you  
want to set to Auto:  
1
Nega/Posi  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Copy Auto:Paper Size  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the setting you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen On.  
2
3
Press or until the item you want appears. In this example, we ve chosen  
Document size.  
2
Nega/Posi  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Copy Auto:Doc. Size  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting. The machine returns to the standby mode with  
following display:  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
3
Copy <Nega/Posi> 1  
Ltr Auto  
100%  
4.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Setting combine  
Default setting: Off  
Note: This feature is available only for the MFX-1700 model.  
If you frequently use the combine feature, you can set it to on for default setting by fol-  
lowing procedure.  
Press Program key,B,3,0,8,ENTER.  
1
Combine  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the setting you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen On.  
2
3
Combine  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting. The machine return to the standby mode with fol-  
lowing display:  
Copy <Combine>  
1
Ltr Auto 100%  
Helpful Tip: You can override the setting of combine just by pressing COMBINEbefore  
you press STARTto make copies.  
4.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Settings for operation  
If you want to turn off the alarm, select On and the machine will be quiet.  
Otherwise, the machine will beep.  
Setting the silent mode  
Default setting: Off  
Press ENTERto save the setting. The LCDnow asks if you want the key tones on or  
of:f  
7
Silent mode allows you to mute the ringer, the alarm and the key tones.  
Ringer If you turn the ringer off in silent mode, a ring alerts you when you receive  
fax or voice call and a call request.  
KeyBuzzer Silent:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Alarm Ifyou disable the alarm in silent mode, the sound your machine makes  
when an error occurs and the beep your machine makes after sending or receiving a  
fax or making a copy cannot be heard.  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
8
9
If you want to turn off the tones, select On and the machine will be quiet.  
Otherwise, the machine will beep when the keys are pressed.  
Key tone If you mute the key tone, your machine will not make a sound when you  
press the buttons on the control panel.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
Press Program key,B,1,0,4,ENTER.The LCDshows your fax s current setting:  
1
If you turned off the alarm or the key tones in the steps above, your machine gives  
you the option of setting the volume for the alarm and key tones. If this option  
appears, skip to step 10.  
Silent Mode  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
If you didn t turn any of these off, your fax machine returns to standby mode.  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
2
3
The LCDshows your fax scurrent setting:  
Note: If you chose On, the silent mode of Ringer,Alarm orKey tone can be set  
to be available. If you chose Off, the machine will ring and beep as  
usual.  
10  
11  
Alarm&Key Volume:Mid  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
If you chose Off, skip to step 10.  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Below are the possible settings:  
Press ENTERto save the setting. The LCDnow asks if you want the ringer to be on  
oroff:  
Alarm&Key Volume:Max  
Ringer Silent :Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
= Loudest setting.  
= Medium setting.  
= Low setting.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Alarm&Key Volume:Mid  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
4
5
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
If you want to turn offthe ringer, select On and the machine will be quiet.  
Otherwise, the machine will ring.  
Alarm&Key Volume:Min  
Press ENTERto save the setting. The LCDnow asks if you want the alarm turned on  
orof:f  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
12  
Alarm Silent  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
6
4.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Setting Sleep mode(Energy saving mode)  
Default setting: On  
Setting the paper source  
Default setting: 1st cassette: Fax/Copy, Bypass Tray: Fax/Copy  
Your machine is initially set to be in the Sleep mode automatically when 5 minutes has  
passed after you pressed any key last.  
If you want to set the Sleep mode to Off, you can set it here.  
You can choose one of following for each paper source:  
Fax :  
Select this if you want to use the paper source you selected for faxing  
and list (or report) printing.  
Note: If you want to change the time, see page 1.19.  
Copy :  
Select this if you want to use the paper source you selected for copying  
only.  
Press Program key,B,1,0,5, ENTER.  
1
Fax/Copy : Select this if you want to use the paper source you selected for faxing,  
list (or report) printing and copying.  
Not Used : Select this if you want to use the paper source you selected for PC  
printing.  
Sleep Mode  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
Note: PC printing is available only when your machine has the  
optional printer controller kit.  
2
3
Press Program key,B,1,0,9,ENTER.The LCDshows:  
1
Cassette1 :Fax/Copy  
Helpful Tip: Pressing ENERGYSAVING, you can make the machine to be in the Sleep  
mode immediately regardless of this on/off setting and the time setting on  
page 1.19.  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
Note: AllLEDlamps on the control panel will not be off, even when the machine is in  
the sleep mode.  
2
3
Press ENTERto save the setting. The LCDshows:  
Bypass Tray:Fax/Copy  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Primary mode  
Default setting: None  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
4
5
You can set the primary standby modeinthis operation. After finishing any jobs, your  
machine will return to the mode you set here immediately.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
Press Program key,B,1,0,7, ENTER.  
1
Primary Mode :None  
Setting 2-bin tray (Option)  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Default setting: Copy exit: Lower tray, Fax exit: Upper tray, List exit: Upper tray, PC-  
Fax exit: Upper tray  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
2
3
You will set where to exit the printed paper in this operation.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
Note: This operation will appear only when your machine has the optional 2-bin tray  
unit.  
Press Program key,B,1,1,0, ENTER.  
1
2-Bin Tray  
:Off  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
4.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the default settings  
Printing your settings  
After you ve programmed settings into your machine, print a settingslist. W e  
recommend this, particularly if you re sharing the machine with other users, who might  
change the settings.  
Press or until the mode you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen On.  
2
2-Bin Tray  
:On  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
W ith this list, you can quickly confirm that all of your settings are correct, without having  
to go back and check them on the machine. Or,ifyoudo need to undo  
someone else s changes, this list guides you in returning the machine to your  
preferred settings.  
If you chose On, proceed to step 3.  
If you chose Off, skip to step 7.  
Press ENTER.The LCDasks you to select Lower or Upper tray for copy exit.  
Press or until the tray you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen Upper.  
3
4
Settings are divided into three; Machine Settings, Fax Settings and Copy Settings.  
To print the Machine settings list, press Program key,E,1,0,1,ENTER.  
The LCDwill show the following as the list prints:  
Copy exit  
:Upper  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Machine Settings  
** Printing **  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
The LCDnow asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for fax reception.  
Press or until the tray you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen Lower.  
To print the Fax settings list, press Program key,E,1,0,2,ENTER.  
The LCDwill show the following as the list prints:  
Fax exit  
:Lower  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Fax Settings  
** Printing **  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
To print the Copy settings list, press Program key,E,1,0,3,ENTER.  
The LCDwill show the following as the list prints:  
5
The LCDnow asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for list printing.  
Press or until the tray you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen Lower.  
Copy Settings  
** Printing **  
List exit  
:Lower  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
Note: Please refer to the index at the end of these instructions to locate any  
settings you don t recognize or understand.  
If your machine has the optional RS-232C interface kit, proceed to step 6.  
Otherwise, skip to step 7.  
The LCDnow asks you to select Lower or Upper tray for PC printing.  
Press or until the tray you want appears.  
In this example, we ve chosen Lower.  
Printing a program list  
Your machine can also print a program list. Thislists the functions available on your fax  
machine and the keystrokes needed to complete them. (See also Function Table,  
pages 1.14 1.17.)  
6
7
PC-FAX exit :Lower  
ꢀ/ꢁ/Enter  
To print a program list, press Program key,*,8.  
Press ENTERto save the setting.  
4.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Tips on caring for your machine  
What to do if problems occur  
Glossary  
Clearing paper jams ...................................................5.1  
Print quality problems .................................................5.3  
Troubleshooting ......................................................5.5  
Caring for your fax machine ............................................5.12  
Common questions ..................................................5.14  
Glossary ...........................................................5.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Clearing paper jams  
To remove the document:  
If an original document jams  
If an original document jams in the ADFwhile scanning the document into the  
memory for faxing or copying, the LCDwill show:  
Open the scanner cover.  
1
1
Document Jam  
ContStor Enter/Cancl  
If you do wish to continue the operation, press ENTERand proceed to step 2.  
To abort the operation, press CANCEL.This will erase from memory all pages  
stored during this operation, and the machine will return to standby mode.  
Important: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key,the  
machine will erase from memory all pages stored during this oper-  
ation and the machine will return to the standby mode.  
Lift the original document from the  
machine.  
2
Note: If the document jammed in the following case, the following message will  
appear and the machine will abort the operation anyway; instead, you ll  
have to perform the job again from scratch.  
Note: If you cannot remove the original  
document, open the inner cover  
as shown at right, then remove  
the document.  
The first page of the document jammed  
During the real time transmission or quick memory transmission  
During non-sorting ADFjob  
Open&Close ScanCover  
Reset Document  
Gently close the scanner cover, making sure both sides are snapped down  
securely.  
Also, the Repeat transmission. Error on scan at page xx message will  
be printed out if the document jammed during transmission.  
3
Note: If the original document has become wrinkled or torn, do not re-send it.  
The LCDwill show which page (i. e., which page number) is jammed. To continue  
scanning from the jammed page forward (keeping in mind the Note at the end of  
step 1, above), press STARTafter clearing the jam.  
2
p 2. Reset Document  
Press Start Key  
Note: If you wait more than 60 seconds without pressing any key, the machine  
will begin to send or copy the document(s) it has.  
If you wish to cancel this operation, press STOP.The machine will delete all pages  
from memory and then return to itsstandby mode.  
5.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
If a printout jams inside your machine  
Remove the jammed paper.  
4
To clear a printout jammed inside your machine:  
Important: The fuser unit becomes  
very hot.  
Important: Be careful not to put your hand between the top cover and the machine.  
Do not touch the fuser unit  
when you are removing a  
paper jam.  
Open the top cover.  
1
Note: Avoid getting unfixed toner on  
your hands and clothes.  
Open the side cover.  
Pulling up the jam release lever to remove  
the jammed paper.  
Open the printer cover.  
2
Reset the toner and drum cartridge.  
5
Remove the toner and drum cartridge.  
3
Important: Shield the drum cartridge  
from light, especially strong  
light. Later, if you have to  
remove the cartridge from  
the fax, immediately wrap it  
in a thick cloth to protect it  
from light.  
Gently close the printer  
cover, pressing firmly on the  
both sides of the printer  
cover until you hear it click.  
6
7
Gently close the top cover,  
pressing firmly on the both  
sides of the top cover until  
you hear it click.  
5.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Print quality problems  
If your machine sprintouts develop quality problems, try to find the example below that  
matches your printout problem. When you find one which is like yours, try the suggested  
solutions. If they don t work, contact your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Printouts are too dark  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
Pages are blank  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may not be  
installed correctly.  
Install each cartridge correctly.  
The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may be  
very low.  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to redis-  
tribute the toner inside.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
Printouts have a blurred background  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Pages are black  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
Your fax machine s printer may be due for a service check.  
Call your dealer.  
Printouts are of uneven density  
The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the  
toner cartridge.  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to redis-  
tribute the toner inside.  
Printoutsaretoo light  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
The toner cartridge may be out of toner, or the toner may be  
very low.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to redis-  
tribute the toner inside.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
The drum cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the drum cartridge and check it for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the drum cartridge.  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the toner cartridge and check it for damage.  
ABCDE  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
5.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Printouts have irregularities  
Printouts have toner smudges  
The paper you re using may have absorbed moisture, per-  
haps due either to high humidity or water having been spilled  
on the paper supply.Toner will not adhere well to wet paper.  
Replace the paper with dry paper and try printing again.  
The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the toner car-  
tridge.  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to redis-  
tribute the toner inside. If the problem persists, replace the  
cartridge.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ACDE  
ABCDE  
The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.  
Remove the cartridges and check them for damage. If the  
problem persists, replace either or both of the cartridges as  
indicated.  
If you find smudges on the back ofthe printouts, the transport  
roller may be dirty.  
Your machine normally cleans the transport roller automati-  
cally. If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized  
Muratec dealer.  
Printouts have white and/or black  
lines  
The toner cartridge or drum cartridge  
may be defective.  
Remove the cartridges and check them for  
damage.  
If the problem persists, replace either or both  
of the cartridges as indicated.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Printouts have white spots  
The LED print head may be dirty.  
Using the cleaning paper, gently clean the LED print head.  
The charger may be dirty.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.  
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized Muratec  
dealer.  
The charger may be dirty.  
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.  
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized Muratec  
dealer.  
5.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Troubleshooting  
Occasionally, your fax machine encounters some trouble transmitting or receiving docu-  
ments.Whenitdoes, it alerts you with an alarm. You can identify the problem with LCD  
messages and printed check messagesand error reports, explained in the following  
pages.  
What you see on the LCD  
Change to Fax Mode  
What it means/What to do  
Youtried to to store the document for polling (or  
for F-Code Box) when the machine is in the Copy  
mode. You can store the fax document only when  
the machine is in the Fax mode.  
Check Memory Tx  
Youtried to turn the Fax&Copy feature ON, but the  
memory transmission setting is OFF.To use the  
Fax&Copy feature, the memory transmission set-  
ting must be set to ON.  
Alarm  
Your fax machine sounds an alarm tone a series of short beeps ifeither of these  
two problems occur:  
Set the Memory Tx to ON, then try again.  
Trouble transmitting or receiving  
The machine is out of paper  
Check Paper Size  
Open&Close Top Cover  
The difference sized paper which is not same  
sized paper you told your machine is loaded.  
Set correct sized paper or change the paper size  
setting (see page 1.8 1.10).  
LCDerror messages  
What you see on the LCD  
Close Scanner Cover  
Close Top Cover  
The cover indicated on the LCD is open or has  
not been closed securely.Close it properly.  
What it means/What to do  
All Commands In Use  
Your fax machine has all of its 99 possible delayed  
commands (automatic redialing counts as one)  
stored in memory and cannot accept another.Wait  
until your fax has completed one of the delayed  
commands or delete an existing  
Close 1st Side Cover  
Close 2nd Side Cover  
Close 1st Cassette  
Close 2nd Cassette  
The paper cassette indicated on the LCD is open  
or has not been closed securely.Close it properly.  
command by using REVIEWCOMMANDS.  
Communication Error  
Acommunication error disrupted the reception or  
transmission. If you were transmitting, press STOP  
to clear the error message and then re-try the  
transmission. If you were receiving a fax, try to  
contact the other person and have him/her re-try  
the transmission. (The problem may be entirely  
with his/her machine, phone line, etc.)  
Already Stored  
Box In Use  
You tried to enter the same fax (or phone) number  
which is already entered in your fax machine.  
Enter a different fax (or phone) number.  
You tried to erase a F-Code box which contains at  
least one document.  
Erase the document(s), then try again.  
Call For Service  
The scanner lamp is dim or inoperable.  
Make repeated copies to help evaporate any inter-  
nal moisture. If that doesn t resolve the problem,  
call your authorized Muratec dealer or Muratec  
Customer Support.  
Copy Off  
You tried to change your fax machine to the copy  
mode, but the unit s copy protection feature (page  
2.18) is on, preventing such use. Turn off copy  
protection.  
Department Code Full  
Youtried to enter department code more than 100.  
Your machine can store up to 100 department  
codes.  
5.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
What you see on the LCD  
Hang Up Phone  
What it means/What to do  
Document Full  
You tried to enter an document into an F-Code  
box, but the machine has reached its capacity (30  
documents).Delete documentsstored in  
F-Code boxes until the machine will let you pro-  
ceed.  
The optional handset is off-hook.  
Hang it up, making sure the upper part of the  
handset presses down on the hook button.  
In Relay Box  
Youtried to store a document for polling in an F-  
Code box which is set to be a relay box.  
Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin  
box, then try again.  
Document Jam  
ContStor Enter/Cancl  
Anoriginal document jam while you are using  
the ADFfor either faxing or copying. See page 5.1  
for instructions on clearing the jam.  
In Secure Box  
Youtried to store a document for polling in an F-  
Code box which is set to be a security box.  
Select an F-Code box which is set to be a bulletin  
box, then try again.  
Document Stored  
Enter No. (0-32)  
You tried to erase a batch box which contains at  
least one document. Erase the document(s), then  
try again.  
You tried to enter a call group number greater than  
32. Your machine can maintain 32 call groups,  
numbered 1-32 (call group 0 covers all the  
groups).Determine the correct call group identifier  
number and enter it, instead.  
In Use in P OneTouch  
Youtried to erase the F-Code box or Batch box,  
which is programmed in the programmable one-  
touch key.  
Erase the programmable one-touch key that con-  
tains the F-Code box or Batch box you want to  
erase, then try again.  
Enter Reduce/Enlarge  
You tried to copy your document on the paper  
other than Letter, Legal or Half letter sized paper  
using the bypass tray, or the calculated reduction  
or enlargement ratio is out of the acceptable range  
(50 200 %) when the copy reduction or enlarge-  
ment ratio is set to Auto .  
Enter the reduction or enlargement ratio manually  
although a part of the image might be lacked, or  
change the paper for copying.  
Invalid I.D. Code  
Invalid Number  
Invalid Paper Size  
The F-Code box  
I.D.code you entered isn t valid.  
Try re-entering your F-Code box  
I
.
D.code.  
You pressed a key which has no function during  
the current operation.  
Ifthe optional printer controller is attached to your  
machine, it can use the special sized paper with  
the bypass tray. However, itshould be used only  
for the PC printing, it cannot be used for copying.  
So, if you tried to copy onto the special sized  
paper with bypass tray, this message will appear.  
Enter Scan Size  
Feeder In Use  
When you using the FBS(Flatbed scanner) glass,  
you must manually enter the scan size of your  
document. Press DOCUMENTSIZE to choose the  
size.  
Invalid Passcode  
Line Busy  
The protection passcode you entered isn t valid.  
Repeat the operation, entering the correct protec-  
tion passcode.  
The command you re trying to enter requires the  
use of the ADF, which is already in use. W aitforthe  
machine to stop using the ADF, then try again.  
You tried to erase a document which someone is  
polling from your machine. W ait for the fax to com-  
plete the polling operation, then try again.  
5.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
What you see on the LCD  
Macro In Use  
What it means/What to do  
What you see on the LCD  
No Passcode  
What it means/What to do  
Youtried to change the function for a Softkey,but  
that Soft key has been programmed in a Macro  
key.You cannot change the Softkey function until  
erase the Macro key that contains the Soft key you  
want to change. Erase the Macro key,then try  
again.  
Youtried to program a security feature (see page  
3.49), but there s no protection passcode stored in  
your fax machine. Store a protection passcode in  
your machine, then retry again.  
No PIN Number  
Youselected Mode1 in the PIN mask feature and  
tried to call an autodialer number in which no PIN  
has been entered, or to call using numeric keypad  
without PIN.Enter a PIN, then try again.  
Memory Overflow  
Start Or Cancel  
During transmission (or copying), you tried to  
enter more pages into memory than your fax could  
store. Press START to tell your fax to keep as many  
pages in memory as possible, or press CANCELto  
delete from memory all pages stored during this  
operation (but not previous operations).  
No Report  
Yourequested an activity journal or confirmation  
report, but your fax machine has no record of any  
fax jobs having occurred.  
No Toner Cartridge  
Not Allowed in Macro  
Other Key Setting  
The toner cartridge is missing or has not been  
properly installed in your fax machine. Please  
properly install the toner cartridge.  
Mirror Carriage Error  
The mirror carriage of your machine has become  
inoperable. Call your authorized Muratec dealer or  
Muratec Customer Support.  
During macro registration, you pressed the key  
which cannot be registered in Macro, such as  
Monitor/Call key or Security Reception key.  
Mirror Locked  
No Command  
The transport mode is not turned of.f  
Turn off the transport mode (see page 1.8).  
Youpressed REVIEWCOMMANDSto review upcoming  
commands, but your fax machine had none  
stored.  
You tried to enter the same function which is  
already stored in other Softkey.  
Store the different function.  
No Department Code  
Youtried to turn on the department code setting  
but there are no department codes stored in your  
fax machine. Store at least one department code,  
then try again.  
Open Top Cover  
Please Remove Paper  
The paper is jammed in your fax machine.  
Open the cover indicated on the LCD, and  
remove the jammed paper carefully.  
Open 1st Side Cover  
Please Remove Paper  
...or...  
You entered incorrect department code at fax  
sending while the department feature is on. Enter  
correct department code.  
Open 2nd Side Cover  
Please Remove Paper  
Open Top/2-Bin Cover  
Please Remove Paper  
No Document Stored  
No Drum  
You tried to print a document from memory,but  
your fax machine had none stored.  
Remove Bypass Paper  
Open&Close Top Cover  
The drum cartridge is missing or has not been  
properly installed in your fax machine.  
Please properly install the drum cartridge.  
Open&Close ScanCover  
Reset Document  
Either your document wasn t inserted correctly,  
orthe fax to which you re sending can t handle the  
document spage length.Reset the page and try  
again.  
No Number Stored  
You selected an autodialer, batch box or F-Code  
box number for which there is no fax (or phone)  
number programmed. Either choose another num-  
ber or dial a phone number directly from the  
numeric keypad.  
Please Call Service  
The printer unit of your fax machine has become  
inoperable. Call your authorized Muratec dealer or  
Muratec Customer Support.  
5.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
What you see on the LCD  
SecurityRx is Off  
What it means/What to do  
Please Supply Paper  
The paper cassette or bypass tray is out of paper.  
Supply paper to the cassette and/or the bypass  
tray.  
Youtried to turn the security reception ONusing a  
Soft key which is assigned to set the security  
reception to ONorOFF, but security reception set-  
ting has not set to on.  
To turn on or off the security reception using a Soft  
key, first set the security reception setting to on.  
(See pages 3.49 3.50.)  
Please Wait  
Your fax machine s printer is either warming up or  
busy.Please wait until the fax is finished printing  
and then re-try your command or operation.  
Polling In Use  
You tried to store the polling document in your fax  
machine, where one already had been stored.  
W ait for the fax to complete the regular polling  
operation or delete the stored document, then try  
again.  
Select Paper Size  
You tried to make a copy in the following condi-  
tions:  
Paper size selection is set to Auto .  
The bypass tray has the paper other than Letter,  
Legal, Half-letter.  
Paper cassette(s) runs out of paper.  
Press PAPERSIZE to select your desired paper.  
Printer In Use  
The command you re trying to enter requires the  
use of the printer, which is already in use. W aitfor  
the fax to finish printing, then try again.  
Sub-address In Use  
Youtried to enter a sub-address identical to one  
already being used in another F-Code box. Enter a  
different sub-address.  
Protect Doc. Stored  
A received document was in your fax s memory  
when you tried to turn off the security reception  
passcode. Print the received document from your  
faxs memory,then retry the desired operation.  
TONER ALMOST EMPTY  
Your machine is almost out of toner.  
Please contact your authorized Muratec dealer  
soon to purchase a new toner cartridge if you  
don t already have one.  
Ration must be 100%  
Youcannot set the magnification ratio in  
Negative/Positive copy or Ultra copy mode.  
Set the magnification ratio to 100 % to use the  
Negative/Positive copy or Ultra copy mode.  
TONER EMPTY  
PRINTER NOT USABLE  
Your toner cartridge is empty.  
Replace the toner cartridge. Your machine cannot  
print until it is replaced with a new toner cartridge.  
REPLACE DRUM SOON  
Your drum will need to be replaced soon.  
Please contact your authorized Muratec dealer to  
purchase a new drum cartridge if you don t  
already have one.  
Too Many Characters  
You attempted to enter too many numbers or other  
characters in the current operation.  
Press CANCELto delete the extra characters, then  
try again. You may wish to review the operation s  
appropriate instructions.  
REPLACE DRUM UNIT  
PRINTER NOT USABLE  
Your drum cartridge doesn t work.  
Your machine cannot print until it is replaced with a  
new drum cartridge.  
Too Many Locations  
Youtried to enter too many numbers for a broad-  
cast. You can enter up to 200 autodialer number  
and up to 30 numbers entered through the  
numeric keypad.  
Press CANCELto delete the extra numbers and  
then try again.  
Replace it.  
Scanner In Use  
The command you re trying to enter requires the  
use of the scanner, which is already in use. W ait  
for the fax to complete the scan, then re-try the  
desired command.  
5.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
What you see on the LCD  
Too Many Steps  
What it means/What to do  
Errors  
Youtried to enter too many steps for a macro. You  
can enter up to 60 steps into a macro key.  
When sending faxes, your machine occasionally runs into communications errors. These  
can be caused by anything from lightning to telephone line interference. (These same  
factors cause the static,orline noise, you sometimes hear on phone calls.) They also  
can be caused by problems with the fax machine at the other end of the line.  
Unable to Reduce  
Inthe reduction copy using the ADF,ifthe  
calculated ratio is smaller than minimum reduction  
ratio (50%), this message will appear and you can-  
not make the reduction copy.  
Use the FBSglass, however parts of the image  
might not be copied.  
Often, simply trying your call again is all that s necessary. However,if the problem per-  
sists regularly,call your local telephone company for help. If that doesn t help and the  
problem persistsregularly, call your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Error reports  
Use FBS Glass  
Youtried to enlargement copy using the ADF.  
Your machine cannot enlargement copy from the  
ADF.Please set your document on the FBSglass to  
make the enlargement copy.  
When an error occurs, your fax machine printsan error report. Each fax error report lists  
an error message which includes:  
A possible solution to the problem  
The sending location (if the remote fax stores a Location ID ofits own)  
The result which is a special error code.  
Asampleof the document sfirstpage.  
Kinds of error codes  
The error code listed in the Result column of the error report indicates the specific  
problem encountered:  
D
R
T
codes Occur while dialing  
codes Occur during reception  
codes Occur during transmission  
Specific errors  
Following are some error codes you may see on an error report:  
Dialing errors  
D.0.3, The remote unit didn t respond, the call couldn t be completed or STOPwas  
D.0.8 pressed during dialing. Re-try the call. If your machine repeats the message,  
call the remote fax unit s operator and verify that unit is operating properly.  
D.0.2 The remote unit is busy.Try the call again.  
D.0.6, Either the remote unit didn t respond, the call somehow didn t go through or  
D.0.7 STOPwas pressed during dialing. Trythe call again.  
5.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Reception errors  
T.2.3 Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Conditions can  
change rapidly,sotry the call again later.  
R.1.1 The calling fax machine didn t respond to your fax machine. This can happen if  
someone dials a wrong number or if the remote machine restricts access  
through use of a passcode.  
T.3.1 The page counter in your fax machine detected a document feeder error during  
transmission. Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try the call.  
T.3.2 The fax machine didn t detect the silence indicating the call had ended.  
R.1.2 The two fax machines were incompatible.Your fax machine sends and receives  
only ITU- Group 3 (see Glossary,page 5.18) fax communication, the industry  
standard since the early 1980s.  
T
T.4.1 The telephone line disconnected during transmission because of excessive  
modem errors or because remote unit ran out of paper.Trythe call again.  
R.1.4 Someone pressed STOPat the receiving fax machine.  
T.4.2 After transmission began, poor line conditions developed. Trythe call again.  
T.4.4 Poor line conditions prevented transmission. Trythe call again.  
R.2.3 Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Call someone  
at the remote machine slocation.  
T.5.1, ECMtransmission failed (perhapsdue to line noise). Conditions can change  
T.5.2, rapidly, so try the call again later.  
T.5.3  
R.3.1 The sending fax machine detected too many errors from the receiving  
fax machine.  
R.3.3 The sending fax machine is incompatible or had a document feeder problem  
during transmission.  
T.8.1 Acompatibility error occurred.  
T.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.  
T.8.11 The remote fax machine didn t complete the equalizer training phase.  
R.3.4 Poor phone line conditions may have prevented your fax machine from properly  
printing some or all of the pages it received.  
R.4.2 Either the line disconnected before transmission or the transmitting fax machine  
needs maintenance.  
R.4.4 The fax machine has reached its memory capacity.  
R.5.1, ECMreception failed (perhaps due to line noise).  
R.5.2  
R.8.1 Acompatibility error occurred.  
R.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.  
R.8.11 The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.  
Transmission errors  
T.1.1 The remote fax machine didn t respond to your machine. Call someone at the  
remote machine slocation.  
T.1.2 Your fax machine spage counter detected a possible document feeder error.  
Carefully put the document back into the feeder and try the call again.  
T.1.4 STOPwas pressed during transmission.  
T.2.1 Either the phone line disconnected during transmission or fax communication  
became impossible due to bad phone line conditions. Trythe call again.  
T.2.2 The two fax machines were incompatible.Your fax machine sends and receives  
only ITU-  
T
Group 3 (see Glossary, page 5.18) fax communication, the industry  
standard since the early 1980s.  
5.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Check Message printouts  
When there s a problem with a fax call and your machine detects an error, it produces  
an error printout headed by the words Check Message. This printout lists the following  
information about the transmission:  
The resulting error code  
A communications error message (see What error messages can mean, below)  
The phone number (or TTI, if programmed) of the fax machine with which your  
machine had attempted to communicate.  
What error messages can mean  
The error messages on Check Message printouts can mean a variety of things. Here sa  
brief summary:  
Error message  
Possible meanings  
Check condition of remote fax.  
Remote machine malfunctioned  
No handshake signals from remote fax  
Wrong phone number reached  
Repeat transmission.  
Poor phone line conditions  
No handshake signals from remote fax  
Document misfeed or miscount  
Unable to reach remote machine after  
attempting specified number of redial tries  
Line is busy.  
Remote machine s line was busy  
Remote machine sline didn t answer  
Check received documents.  
Remote confirmation signal not received  
from remote fax  
Poor line conditions caused a poor image  
Memory full.  
Remote fax s memory is full  
Dialing number is not set.  
Stopped.  
Stored phone number failed to dial properly  
Someone pressed STOPat the remote fax  
in the middle of the handshake  
5.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Caring for your fax machine  
W ithproperinstallation and a little maintenance, your fax machine should give you  
dependable service for years to come.  
Corrective cleaning  
Here are some simple cleaning procedures for keeping your fax machine operating  
smoothly. Use each as the need arises.  
Although it requires little day-to-day care, you can take these simple precautions to  
keep it in top form:  
Alwaysmake sure your fax machine is installed according to our specifications,  
including using an electrical surge suppressor. (If necessary, review Pick an installa-  
tion spot, page 1.5.)  
Curing frequent jams in the ADF  
If you re having trouble with getting your original documents to feed properly,trythis  
procedure:  
Alwaysuse good, copier-quality paper.  
Turn off your fax machine.  
Alwaysclean your fax machine as needed (see Cleaning tips, below).  
1
2
Neverinstall your fax machine where it can overheat, gather dust or get splashed by  
any liquids (even water).  
Get two soft, lint-free cloths and moisten them as follows:  
One with a cleaner suitable for use on platen/rubber rollers. In steps 4 and 6,  
we ll call this the rollers cleaner.  
The other with isopropyl alcohol  
Cleaning tips  
Open the scanner cover by holding the scanner cover release.  
Some things to keep in mind about cleaning your fax machine:  
3
Important: You must hold the cover open. It won t stay open by itself.  
Do clean it! Dust and dirt, especially around the fax machine sair vents can shorten  
your machine slife.  
Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner to clean the face of the rollers. Rotate the  
rollers by hand to allow cleaning of the entire roller surface.  
4
Alwaysunplug the fax machine before you clean it.  
Never spray any cleaner DIRECTLY onto your fax machine. The drifting spray could  
damage componentsinside.  
Never try to clean SEALEDareas inside your fax machine. They re sealed to pro-  
tect your safety and the machine.  
For cleaning external surfaces, such as the cover and handset: use a mild cleaning  
solution sprayed onto a lint-free towel or cloth.  
Alwaysuse a lint-free cloth (or swabs) moistened with alcohol to gently wipe compo-  
nents inside your machine.  
In areas you can t reach with swabs, alwaysuse dry, dust-free compressed air to  
gently blow away dust and other material.  
5.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
If you have unsatisfactory printout quality  
Open the inner cover fully.  
5
6
Your machine automatically cleans its charger and transport roller, two items which are  
very important to printout quality. So, if you notice poor printout quality (whether on  
received faxes or on copies), it may mean that your machine requires service. Review  
Print quality problems (pages 5.3-5.4), and see whether any of the proposed solutions  
helps your machine. If none do, please call your authorized Muratec dealer or call the  
Important: You must hold the cover open. It won t stay open by itself.  
Use the cloth with the rollers cleaner to  
clean the face of the rollers. Rotate the  
rollers by hand to allow cleaning of the  
entire roller surface.  
Muratec Customer Support Center at (800) 347-3296 (from the U.S. only)  
.
Cleaning the LED print head  
If you find your fax recipients complaining that the faxes you receive or copy image  
quality are streaked, the LED print head may be dirty.  
Important: Be careful not to put your hand between the top cover and the machine.  
Cleaning the FBSglass, Contact glass and white pad  
Turn off your fax machine.  
1
2
Open the platen cover.  
1
Get a soft, lint-free cloth and moisten it  
with isopropyl alcohol.  
Get a soft, lint-free cloth and moisten it with isopropyl alcohol.  
2
Important: Make sure the cloth doesn t have any rough areas. Otherwise, it  
could scratch the glass surface of the FBS.  
Open the top cover and then open the  
printer cover.  
3
Using the cloth, gently clean the FBSglass, contact glass and the white back-  
ground area on the underside of the platen cover.  
3
Important: The fuser unit becomes  
very hot. Do not touch the  
fuser unit when you are cleaning the LED print head.  
Using the cloth, gently clean the LED print head.  
4
Note: Do not use abrasive materials on the LED print head, and do not subject  
the LED print head to strongly shock.  
5.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Common questions  
Sending faxes  
Q: Sometimes, I try to send a fax while using either the optional handset or the MONI-  
TOR/CALLfeature. But, when the other side answers, I hear a horrible screeching  
sound, so I hang up. What s happening?  
W e re here to help you!  
The Muratec InformationSystemisavailable to you 24 hours a day, 7 days a  
week. You can use your fax machine to call this fax-on-demand system and  
receive printouts of information, such as the most common questions asked  
about your machine. Often,this is the fastest way to find out the answer to any  
question you may have. Andit s a free call!  
A: That was the other fax machine trying to say Hello to your machine! Youllhear  
sounds like that any time you call a fax machine which is set to answer automati-  
cally (as when you set your machine to Auto Answer mode). It s by using these  
tones that fax machines are able to send faxes over ordinary phone lines. So, next  
time you hear the tones, press START(and, if you re using an optional handset,  
hang up) to send a fax.  
To use the Muratec Information System:  
On your fax machine, press MONITOR/CALLto get a dial tone, or lift your  
optional handset.  
1
Q: I just sent a fax. However, the number that appeared in my machine s display dur-  
ing the transmission wasn t the number I dialed. Why?  
Note: If you want to use MONITOR/CALLkey, you should assign it to a  
Soft key in advance. (See page 3.16.)  
A: That number you saw is programmed into the remote fax machine by the user.  
Some users prefer different numbers to appear than the ones they re really using.  
And some people don t know how to change the number once it sset.  
Call1-800-215-1698.  
2
3
Follow the voice instructions you ll receive from the system.  
Q: Can I transmit and receive at the same time?  
A: No. Use the call request feature (see page 3.24) to ask the person at the remote  
fax machine if he or she wants to transmit or receive after your fax communication  
is complete.  
General questions  
Q: Where do I add ink or toner to make my fax machine sprintouts darker?  
Q: Do I have to dial a 1 for a long-distance call?  
A: You can t adjust the darkness of an incoming fax printout, but you can adjust the  
darkness of a copy or of a transmission. Insert a document and press CONTRASTto  
adjust the contrast setting. Dark prints at the darkest setting. The machine will  
reset automatically to normal contrast after you finish copying or sending the fax.  
A: Yes. Dialing a fax number is just like dialing any other phone number, so be sure to  
include any special long-distance codes or dialing pauses when dialing. Also,  
remember to include them when you set your autodialer numbers.  
Q: When I unplug my machine or if the power goes off,will I lose the information I ve  
stored such as my TTI, autodialer entries, the time and date, etc. and have to  
re-enter them?  
Q: How do I send a fax to an overseas telephone number?  
A: Dialing requirements for international calls may vary depending on your local tele-  
phone company s requirements. For most international calls, call 011, then dial the  
appropriate country code, city code and phone number.(You may find country and  
city codes in the front section of your telephone directory.)  
A: No. There s a special battery built into your fax machine which protects user set-  
tings for several days if power fails or if you decide to move your machine.  
However, wedoadvise you to restore power to the machine as soon as possible.  
Q: Can I transmit if my fax machine runs out of paper?  
Q: Can I use a dust cover on my fax machine?  
A: Yes, but confirmation reports (see page 3.21) aren t available when you transmit  
without recording paper in your fax machine.  
A: No! A dust cover blocks air circulation, which could cause your machine to over-  
heat.  
5.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Q: The specifications (page AI.1) list an average per-page transmission time, but when  
Q: Can I transmit a document that s extra long?  
I transmit a page it can take much longer. Why?  
A: Yes,fithe receiving fax machine is equipped to handle long documents. Many  
machines have a special setting which allows them to receive documentsthat  
exceed the normal length.  
A: W e base this specification on transmission of an industry-standard test document  
called ITU- Test Document 1 (sometimes also called the Slerexe letter ). Fax man-  
T
ufacturers use this method to test transmission speeds. However:  
Q: Can I transmit a page from a newspaper?  
The pages you send may be darker, orotherwise contain more information, than  
ITU-TTest Document 1.  
A: No. A newspaperpage can jam in your document feeder. First, use a copy machine  
to make an appropriately sized copy of the newspaper page, then transmit the  
copy.  
The transmission time measured for test documents doesn t include handshake  
time the time during which two fax machines introduce themselves to each  
other and agree on the parameters of the call.  
Q: Can I transmit a page with correction fluid on it?  
The specification time is based on the use of normal resolution mode. You may  
be using fine, superfine or grayscale transmission, each of which takes longer  
than normal mode.  
A: Yes, but only if the fluid is completely dry before you begin transmission.  
Q: How can I be sure my fax was received?  
Q: What sadefault?  
A: Set your machine to print a confirmation report after each transmission (see pages  
3.22).  
A: A default is a setting that your machine will always refer to if nothing else is pro-  
grammed. For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a fax by  
using its memory.Ifyou set this action as the default, that s how your machine will  
always send a fax, until you tell it to do differently.  
Q: I don t want to install a dedicated phone line for my fax machine, so I ve connected  
the machine to a PBXphone system. When I get a fax call, all the phones ring. How  
do I prevent this?  
A: Call your PBXmanufacturer or telephone company for assistance. They may be  
able to convert one of the PBXlines for use only by your fax machine.  
Reports  
Q: Sometimes when I dial a fax call by using either the optional handset or  
MONITOR/CALL,I don t hear the fax receiving tones from the other machine.  
Am I doing something wrong?  
Q: I called the number 011-555-555-1212, but not all of the digits appear on my trans-  
mit confirmation report (TCR). Why didn t the whole number appear? How can I be  
sure my document went to the right location?  
A: When this happens, try pressing START(and then hanging up the optional handset if  
you re using it), as usual. It s possible you re calling an older, non-standard fax  
machine that doesn t emit answering tones. Even a few Group 3 faxes (see  
Glossary, page 5.18) on the market sound a sending tone but don t sound a  
receiving tone. After you transmit, call the person at the other fax machine s loca-  
tion to see if that person got your document.  
A: The numbers you enter using the fax keypad are temporarily stored in a memory  
buffer,andit s only the last part of the phone number that the buffer remembers.  
An easy way to avoid getting incomplete telephone numbers on your printoutsisto  
store your most frequently used numbers as one-touch keys or speed-dial num-  
bers. These autodialer numbers will appear in their entirety on your TCR.  
Q: I inserted a document in the feeder and dialed a fax number, but my machine didn t  
transmit the document. Instead, ** Auto Redial ** now appears on my LCD.  
What does this mean?  
A: The remote fax machine was busy, soyour machine will try the call again, automat-  
ically.As long as it hasn t stored more than 99 delayed commands (counting  
automatic redials), your machine should still accept commands from you. If it has  
exceeded this quantity and will accept no more commands, try canceling one of the  
delayed commands (see page 2.8). If the machine still won t cooperate, keep can-  
celing commands until it does.  
5.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Receiving faxes  
Q: My fax never answers. What s wrong?  
Polling  
Q: What s the purpose of polling?  
A: Check to make sure your fax machine is properly connected to a working ACpower  
outlet and phone jack (see page 1.7). If you re using a second phone with your  
machine, make sure itsconnected properly (page 2.20).  
A: Polling lets you automatically pull a document which is set in another fax  
machine. You can poll whenever you need to retrieve information and don t want  
the source to pay for the phone call. With polling, you pay for the call and get the  
information you need.  
Q: Sometimes when I answer my machine with the optional handset, I hear a beeping  
sound that repeats every few seconds. Is this a fax?  
A: Yes. When you hear these fax tones, someone is trying to send you a fax. Next  
time, press STARTand hang up the handset. Your fax will receive the message.  
How your fax machine works  
How a fax machine works is simple:  
Q: Does my fax machine have to be plugged in to the ACpower jack to receive a mes-  
sage?  
You put a page into your fax machine s feeder and call a fax number.Your machine  
makes a satisfactory connection with the other machine, and then  
A: Yes.Your phone will ring if the phone line is connected, but you can t receive a fax  
unless your fax machine is plugged into both the phone jack and the ACpower jack.  
Make sure your fax machine is always plugged in so you never miss an important  
fax message.  
Your machine takes the document.  
An image scanner in your fax machine examines the information on the page.  
Your machine wraps the document.  
Your fax machine translates the scanned information into a numeric code and com-  
presses the code for the fastest possible transmission speed.  
Q: Can I receive a fax if I m using the phone on my machine?  
Your machine sends the document.  
Finally, your fax machine sends the compressed code.  
A: You can receive a fax from the person to whom you re talking. When that person  
has a document ready in his/her machine s feeder,press START.  
On the other end of the line  
The remote fax machine receives the code.  
W orking with your answering machine  
Your machine unwrapsthe document.  
The remote fax machine uncompresses and deciphers the code, turning it into a rep-  
resentation of the scan your machine made.  
Q: People have complained that they call my fax machine and hear my answering  
machine s message, but are cut off before they can send a fax. What happened?  
A: Any remote fax machine attempting to send a fax must hear responding fax tones  
within 40 seconds after the person at that machine presses the start key.That 40  
seconds includes getting the dial tone, dialing the number, listening to the pause  
before the ringing starts and the remote fax machine answering the ring. Only after  
that time does your message play.  
The remote fax machine prints the representation.  
The only difference between a regular telephone call and a fax call is the content ofthe  
transmission:  
That s why we urge you to create a short outgoing message. The shorter the wait-  
ing period, the more likely it is that the remote fax machine will proceed with the  
transmission. Please create an outgoing message on your answering machine  
that s no longer than 10 seconds (see page 2.11 for a suggestion).  
On a regular call, your telephone sends your voice.  
On a fax call, your fax machine sends a coded image.  
The way fax machines work is regulated closely by the International Telecommunications  
Union (ITU), an agency of the United Nations. The standards the ITU applies ensure the  
compatibility of your fax machine with millions of other machines worldwide. However,  
they also limit the way you can use your machine with other devices, such as tele-  
phones and answering machines.  
5.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Glossary  
This glossary contains terms you may encounter when discussing or reading about fax machines.  
Please use these definitions for reference only.A list of definitions can also be found on the  
Muratec website at www.muratec.com.  
Broadcast  
A fax transmission in which a single document is sent to more than one location.  
bps Bits per second. Used to express the speed of transmission of data. Because fax trans-  
mission treats a document as a graphic image rather than as a series of alphabetic and numeric  
characters, bps does not correspond to the number of characters transmitted per second.  
24-hour format  
Also called military format.A format for keeping time that does not use a.m. or  
Byte A group of digital elements, usually sent as eight bits to the byte.  
p.m. to distinguish between morning and afternoon. In the 24-hour format, one o clock in the  
morning marks 1:00, noon marks 12:00 and midnight marks 24:00. To calculate the 24-hour for-  
mat, add 12 hours to all times after noon.  
Call reserve Also called call request. An ITU- standard fax feature which allows a user to  
request voice communication prior to, during or after transmission.  
T
Call-waiting service An optional telephone company service that alerts you to another incom-  
ing call when the phone is already in use. Call-waiting signals often cause interruption of fax  
transmission or reception.  
For example, 1:30 p.m. would be 13:30 in the 24-hour format; 10:45 p.m. would be 22:45 inthe  
24-hour format. And 11:15 a.m. would be 11:15 in the 24-hour format.  
A3, A4, B4 Standard stationery sizes defined by the International Standards Organization, an  
agency of the United Nations. See also Paper sizes.  
Caller ID Optional service provided by your local telephone company that allows you to see a  
display of the number (phone or fax) that is calling.  
ADF  
Automatic document feeder.See document feeder.  
The number your machine dials after all attempts to the regular number fail.  
CCITT  
See ITU-T.  
Alternate number  
CCD,CIS Charged coupled device, contact image sensor.Two types of scanning mechanisms  
used in some Muratec fax machines. The CCD reads fluorescent light bouncing off a document.  
The CIS uses a flat bar of light-emitting diodes (LEDs).  
The user programs this alternate number,ifsodesired.  
Answering machine See TAD.  
Autodialing Enables user to store preprogrammed telephone numbers in the unit s memory.  
Storage capability varies from unit to unit.  
Command queue  
Command number  
The list your machine keepsofallits pending commands.  
The number your machine gives to each job it is programmed to com-  
Automatic fallback The ability of a fax machine to slow down ( fall back ), when communicat-  
ing with another fax which is communicating at a slower rate.  
plete.You must know the command number in order to cancel or change any of the machine s  
jobs that it stores.  
Automatic reduction Many Muratec fax machines will automatically reduce the size of docu-  
ments being transmitted to accommodate the effective printing width of the receiving unit. For  
example, this allows a fax machine with a 10″ (256 mm) scanning width to send an image 10″  
(256 mm) wide to a unit with an 8.3″ (210 mm) print width.The receiving fax machine will receive  
a reduced-size printout of the complete image.  
Compatibility The term compatible describes the ability of separate things to function  
together.Your Muratec fax machine features ITU- Group 3 compatibility, the modern standard for  
T
worldwide communication.  
Confidential transmission See SecureMail.  
Confirmation report See TCR.  
Continuous polling See Polling.  
Bit The smallest unit of information in a computer. Some Muratec fax machines, which are  
actually computers dedicated to telecommunications, allow users to change bits of information  
to provide or cancel features through software settings.  
Copy mode Allows your fax machine to be used as a convenience copier.  
Cover page (automatic) A small, user-created message; can be the first page of every trans-  
mission.  
Bits per second See bps.  
Black density Also called black coverage. The amount of non-white area on a page. For  
example, most regular office correspondence has a black density well under 10%, due to the  
presence of margins, spaces between words, spaces between lines and paragraphs and even  
spaces within letters.However, drawings and photographs have a much higher black density,  
sometimes approaching 100%. The higher a page s black density, the more slowly a fax machine  
sends it.  
Database polling See Polling.  
Data compression Used in digital fax machines to speed transmission. See also Digitalfax,  
MHand MSE,SMSE.  
5.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Default The setting your machine will always refer to if no other action has been programmed.  
Group 3 Refers to fax machines that use digital encoding. These units transmit one page in  
For example, you can set the default for this machine to send a fax by using its memory.Ifyouset  
this action as the default, that s how your machine will always send a fax, until you tell it to do dif-  
ferently.  
less than one minute and produce resolution of 203 × 98, 203 × 196, or 406 × 392 lpi.  
Halftone See Grayscale.  
Handshaking An exchange of data between telecommunications and/or  
computer equipment that introduces two systems to each other. For example, faxes use a hand-  
Delayed command Transmission or polling operation set by the user to occur later, automati-  
cally, at a predetermined time. Great for reducing costs by making fax calls during times when  
telephone costs are lowest, such as late at night or on weekends.  
shaking protocol to identify the ITU-  
T
group of each unit and to begin fax communication.  
Hub See Relay broadcasting.  
Digital Using the binary system (which uses a combination of 0s or1s) to describe everything,  
so that 0 means off and 1 means on;digital fax machines convert the graphic image of your docu-  
ment into a series of zeros and ones by using the binary system of transmission to encode black  
and white occurrences. This increases transmission speed by passing over white spaces. See  
also White-line skip.  
Hz(orHertz) A measure of frequency equal to one cycle per second. Used in the specifica-  
tions for a fax machine, it identifies the ACpower the unit requires.  
ITU-T  
International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Sector. (Formerly known  
as CCITT,forConsultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone.)A telecommuni-  
cations forum for member countries of the United Nations whose Study Group XIV established the  
primary groups for fax equipment, covering communication protocol and transmission. Muratec  
Digital fax Unlike analog systems that scan every portion of a document, digital fax machines  
survey a document soverall picture content. Digital fax machines scan a line and convert the  
information into a binary code of zeros and ones. The fax machine takes this information and  
compresses it, providing high transmission speeds. Many Muratec unitsoffer proprietary methods  
for faster transmissions between Muratec-manufactured units(see also MSE,SMSE).  
Group 3 fax machines offer the fastest transmissions allowed by the ITU-  
with other Group 3 units.  
Test Document 1 Also called the Slerexe ( slehr-rehks ) letter; An ITU- standard docu-  
T
when communicating  
ITU-T  
T
ment with a known black density which fax makers often use to test transmission speeds of their  
fax machines. Published transmission speeds are also based on this document.  
DIP switches Dual in-line package switch; a two-position on/off switch. Many Muratec fax  
machines include DIP switches to control optional settings or features.  
ITU-T V.29 and V.27 ter. A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax machines to  
talk to all other units adhering to those standards.  
Document feeder  
The adjustable slot into which users place documentsfor faxing or copying.  
Effective printing width The widest image that can be printed on a fax.  
JBIG Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU- standard image data compression  
T
Effective scan width The maximum widththe scanner in a fax can scan during transmission.  
method. As JBIG compresses the data more efficiently than MMR, itisespeciallyeffective when  
transmitting halftone (grayscale) image document.  
F-Code Afax-industry standard created by the ITU-Tfor sub-addressing/password-based com-  
munications. Because F-Code is an industry standard, Muratec fax machines as well as all ITU-  
T
(Of course, the compression ratio may vary with the image data.)  
equipped fax machines from other manufacturers can communicate with each other using sub-  
addressing.  
Laser printing A plain-paper printing system. Toner is attached to a charged drum and an  
image is transferred onto plain paper through electrical currents, then fused with heat and pres-  
sure to produce a dry, permanent printout.  
Facsimile (orfax) A form of communication involving the scanning and decoding of a document  
into electrical signals and transmitting of the document, over telephone lines to another device.  
This device then reconstructs the signals to produce an exact duplicate of the document. Also, a  
machine that performs such communication.  
LCD Liquid crystaldisplay. Used on some Muratec unitsforstatus displays.  
Leased line See Private line.  
Load number Anumber assigned to telecommunications equipment used in Canada;  
designed to help prevent overloading on a telephone circuit. See also Ringer equivalence num-  
ber.  
Fallback Group 3 fax machines operate at the highest transmission speed possible on a given  
telephone line. Muratec systems offer automatic fallback; if line quality drops during transmission,  
the fax machine will reduce speed to the fastest possible level.  
Location ID See Station ID.  
File number  
A number the machine gives to each document it stores for a batch, F-Code or  
lpi Lines per inch. The way fax image resolution is measured. (For example, see Normal reso-  
lution.)  
polling operation.  
Fine resolution 203H × 196V lpi.Also shown as  
G
3F  
( Group 3 fine ) on some fax units.  
Memory Internal document storage. In Muratec fax machines, random access memory in the  
form of computer chips is used to store and hold documents for transmission and to hold some  
documentsthathave been received.  
Grayscale Not a level of resolution, but a method of scanning and transmitting halftone  
images. Fax machines with grayscale abilities interpret photographs in  
levels of gray between white and black. The transmitting fax machine must have grayscale ability  
to send a photographic image accurately, but the receiving machine does not need it to print the  
image.  
Memory overflow  
Amessage that appears on the machine sLCDwhen the  
current operation requires more of the machine s electronic memory than what is available.  
5.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
MH Modified Huffman, the standard ITU-  
T
Group 3 data compression method. A one-dimen-  
Paper sizes  
All are width× length:  
sional coding scheme that compresses datainahorizontal direction only.A feature of all Muratec  
fax machines, MHassures transmissions faster than one page per minute when communicating  
with other Group 3 units, regardless of  
Letter-sized = 8.5″ × 11.0″ (216 × 279 mm)  
A5 = 5.8″ × 8.3″ (148 × 210 mm)  
A4 = 8.3″ × 11.7″ (210 × 297 mm)  
A3 = 11.7″ × 16.5″ (297 × 420 mm)  
Legal-sized = 8.5″ × 14.0″ (216 × 356 mm)  
B5= 7.2″ × 10.1″ (182 × 257 mm)  
B4 = 10.1″ × 14.3″ (257 × 364 mm)  
manufacturer. See also MR,MMR,MSE,SMSE.  
Military format See 24-hour format.  
Passcode  
Afour-digit code-number. On your fax machine, the protection passcode letsthe  
user limit access to fax operations, as well as certain settings and even documentsreadied for  
polling (in the case of polling, only calling machines whose users enter the proper passcode will  
be able to poll the document.)  
Modem Modulator-demodulator.A device that convertsdigitaldata, like information from a fax  
machine, into an analog signal for transmission over ordinary telephone lines. A modem is  
included in a fax machine and allows it to be connected directly to a PSTNtelephone line.  
PBX(orPABX) Private branch exchange; privately-owned telephone equipment serving a partic-  
ular building, business or area. Many PBXsystems use digital transmission lines which, unlike  
more common PSTNlines, are not compatible with fax machine use. The user should not connect  
a fax unit to a PBXwithout first checking with the system manufacturer or service representative.  
MR Modified Read, an ITU- Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-dimensional  
T
coding scheme that compresses datainboth horizontal and vertical directions and allows for  
faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless of manufacturer.  
See also MH,MMR,MSE,SMSE.  
PCL Page Control Language. Anindustry standard for printer control. Some Muratec fax  
machines include or offer PCL-compatible printing for Windows-based personal computers.  
MMR Modified Modified Read, an ITU- Group 3 standard data compression method. A two-  
T
dimensional coding scheme that compresses datainboth horizontal and vertical directions and  
allows for faster transmission when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless of manu-  
facturer. See also MH,MR,MSE,SMSE.  
Platen  
A traditional copier-style top to a fax machine or digital copier. Some Muratec fax  
machines and multifunctional products include a platen top, allowing you to fax from books and  
other awkward sources.  
Monitor A speaker in most Muratec fax machines which allows the user to hear the dialing  
process. This is not a speakerphone, because it has no microphone for speaking to the person  
being called. For regular two-way voice communication, users must use the optional handset.  
See also On-hook dialing.  
Polling Automatic transmission to a calling remote fax, or reception of a document from a  
remote fax set for this operation. Polling is convenient whenever a central unit must receive infor-  
mation from one or several remote faxes. The caller bears all telephone charges and prevents  
several remote units from calling at the same time. See also Secure polling.  
MSE,SMSE Muratec sproprietary data compression methods, allowing a Muratec-manufactured  
fax machine to transmit more quickly when communicating with another Muratec-manufactured  
unit.MSEand SMSEare features on many Muratec fax machines. See also MH,MR,MMR.  
Private line (Or leased line.)A service offered by many telephone systems; provides an exclu-  
sive phone circuit between two geographic points.A Muratec fax does not require a private line.  
See also PSTN.  
Normal resolution Shown as norm ; 203H × 98V lpi.The default resolution mode for all  
Muratec fax machines.  
Proprietary Non-standard. In fax, refers to a fax feature which works only in communications  
between fax machines that are the same brand.  
One-touch dialing Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dialing with the  
touch of one key. See also Autodialing and Speed-dialing.  
PSTN Public switched telephone network; the most common type of telephone lines and service  
in use, in contrast to private or leased lines. A Muratec fax provides fast, reliable data transmis-  
sion over a PSTNline, and does not need a special or dedicated telephone line. See also Private  
line.  
QuadAccessfi Muratec s QuadAccess allows your Muratec fax machine to perform four or  
more tasks simultaneously without slowing.  
On-hook dialing Dialing numbers by using the keypadonthe fax unit without lifting a handset.  
On most Muratec fax models, the user can do this either silently or by using the monitor. See also  
Monitor.  
Original document size The largest (or smallest) document that can be fed safely through a  
fax machine.  
Receiver ID See Station ID.  
Override  
To change existing settings.  
Redialing The dialing again, either manually or automatically controlled, of the most recently  
dialed fax or phone number.Automatic redialing follows an unsuccessful dialing attempt and can  
be done manually or automatically.  
5.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
Relay broadcasting Lets some Muratec fax machines store a document in internal memory,  
Super Group 3  
An extension of Group 3 fax technology standards, allowing the use of high-  
transmit the document to the memory of a remote hub fax and then instruct that unit to relay (re-  
transmit) the document to each fax in a call group in the hub unit. This feature speeds extremely  
high-volume fax communication and allows a single command to initiate document transmission  
to hundreds of preprogrammed fax locations. It also saves phone charges for the originating  
machine. Your machine can initiate a relay broadcast.  
speed v.34 bis modems for 33.6 Kbps transmission and high-speed protocols for rapid  
handshaking.  
Superfine resolution 203H × 392V lpi.Your Muratec fax machine s superfine transmission  
mode is Group-3-compatible, not the more limited proprietary version.  
TAD  
Telephone answering device, or answering machine. Records incoming voice messages  
for playback. You can connect a TAD to a Muratec fax machine and use the two on one phone line.  
Transmit confirmation report; this provides proof that your Muratec fax did send the docu-  
Remote fax machine The machine on the other end of a fax communication.  
REN  
See Ringer equivalence number.  
TCR  
Resolution The resolution of documents transmitted or copied by fax machines is measured  
by the number of horizontal(H) and vertical (V) lines per inch (lpi) the unit can print. A Muratec unit  
may offer one or more of these resolution levels:  
ment you set for transmission. Printed after transmission, the TCRalso identifies the telephone  
number to which the fax sent the document, plus the actual time of transmission and how many  
pages the unit transmitted.  
Normal  
Fine  
Superfine 203H × 392V lpi  
203H × 98V lpi  
Thermal (paper) printing A thermal head heats chemically treated, thermally sensitive paper  
inpatterns conforming to the image the machine has scanned, creating a printed image. Thermal  
paper stendency to discolor and fade, in addition to its curliness and the usual difficultyinwriting  
on it, have made this method considerably less popular than plain-paper fax printing particu-  
larly as plain-paper fax machines have dropped sharply in price.  
203H × 196V lpi  
Some Muratec unitsalso offer grayscale transmission (see also Grayscale) for accurate reproduc-  
tion of photographs and other shaded originals.  
TriAccess Muratec sTriAccess allows a Muratec fax machine to perform three or more tasks  
simultaneously without slowing.  
Ringer equivalence number Also called REN.A number assigned to telecommunications  
equipment used in the United States; designed to prevent overloading on a telephone circuit. See  
also Load number.  
TTI  
Transmit terminal identifier.A user-programmable line of information sent automatically with  
every page a fax machine sends; it appears at the top of each page printed by the receiving unit.  
Scanning width See Effective scanning width.  
Transmission speed How fast a fax machine is sending a fax document. This speed depends  
upon the modem speed of each unit, the resolution setting, the content of the document, the  
encoding technique and the condition of the phone line (clean, noisy,etc.)Any change in any one  
of these five conditions will affect the speed, sometimes significantly.  
SecureMail Allows a Muratec fax user to send a document to or receive one into (usually  
something confidential) an electronic mail box. The transmission is protected at the receiving  
Muratec fax by an access code; the receiving fax prints the document only when an authorized  
user enters the code.  
V.29 and v.27 ter A standard set of communication procedures allowing fax machines to talkto  
other units using those standards. Specifically, these standards cover fax transmission at 9600  
bps or slower.  
Secure polling Polling in which preset passcodes are checked between two machines before  
polling is allowed to take place.  
Speed-dialing Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dialing with the  
touch of three keys an identifier key (either *or#) and then a three-digit code for each num-  
ber. See also Autodialing and One-touch dialing.  
V.34 An international standard for fax modems and other modems with transmission  
speeds of up to 36.6 Kbps. Itrepresents the current maximum standard transmission speed pos-  
sible under ITU-T Group 3.  
Station ID (Also called Location ID orReceiver ID.)An autodialer feature which lets the fax user  
enter a descriptive name to correspond with the number in an autodialer entry. For example,  
rather than entering only 1-972-555-3465, the user can enter that number and a name, such as  
Dallas Branch Office. (Many Muratec models with this feature allow entry of both upper-case and  
lower-case letters, for greater ease of reading.)  
White-line skip A technique used to speed up fax transmission by bypassing redundant areas,  
such as white space.  
Subaddressing  
An ITU-Tstandard allowing fax machines to specify special delivery charac-  
teristics of a transmission. For example, subaddressing allows fax machines from different  
manufacturers to send and receive messages into confidential memory mailboxes, or to retrieve  
specific files from polling memory.  
Subscriber ID  
A fax machine s telephone number,asidentified by a user setting. See TTI.  
5.20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Just in case  
This page intentionally blank.  
5.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Specifications  
Error correction mode:  
Memory capacity:  
Yes  
General  
Type:  
MFX-1300:  
8MB (650 pages* approx.)  
Upgrade Option:  
Desktop plain paper facsimile  
Compatibility:  
MFX-1300:  
ITU-T Group 3  
MFX-1700:  
ITU-T Group 3 and Super Group 3  
plus 8MB (additional 680 pages* approx.)  
MFX-1700:  
8MB (650 pages* approx.)  
Upgrade Option:  
plus 8MB (additional 680 pages* approx.)  
plus 24MB (additional 2040 pages* approx.)  
Phone system:  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or equiva-  
lent  
Dual access:  
One-touch dial:  
Speed dial:  
Multitasking  
55 locations  
145 locations  
Memory backup time:  
(Total memory capacity: Backup time)  
8MB : 72 hours  
16MB: 36 hours  
32MB: 18 hours  
(Must be charged for at least 24 hours to reach full  
charge)  
Operating Environment  
Environmental temperature:  
Relative humidity:  
10” C to 32” C (50 F to 89.6 F)  
20 to 80% RH  
Polling/Broadcasting:  
Transmission speed:  
230 locations / 230 locations  
MFX-1300:Approx. 6 seconds per page.**  
MFX-1700:Approx. 2 seconds per page.**  
Power requirement:  
Power consumption:  
Power: 120V AC 50/60 Hz.  
MFX-1300  
MFX-1700  
Sleep mode  
Standby  
Maximum  
: TBD W  
: TBD W  
: TBD W  
TBD W  
TBD W  
TBD W  
Document input  
Document set:  
ADF :Face Up  
FBS :Face down  
Communication  
Coding method:  
Original reference position:  
Scanning resolution:  
ADF :Center  
FBS :Front right corner  
ITU-T-standard MMR, MR, MH, JBIG (MFX-1700 only)  
and Murata-proprietary MSE.  
(horizontalindots/inch × vertical in lines/inch):  
Modem speed:  
MFX-1700:  
MFX-1300  
MFX-1700  
33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600,  
19,200, 16,800, 14,400, 12,000, 9,600, 7,200, 4,800,  
2,400 bps  
Transmission:  
Normal  
Fine  
Superfine  
Grayscale  
203 98 203 98  
203 196 203 196  
203 392 406 392***  
203 196 203 196(Memory Tx)  
406 392***(Real time Tx)  
MFX-1300:  
14,400, 12,000, 9,600, 7,200, 4,800, 2,400 bps  
Copy:  
MFX-1300: 300 300 dpi  
MFX-1700: 400 300 dpi  
AI.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Scanning method:  
Scanning width:  
Document size :  
Flatbed CCD  
Printing paper size:  
Paper capacity:  
Paper cassette;  
Letter, Legal, Half-letter  
8.2 inch (Fax), 8.5 inch (Copy)  
Bypass tray; *****  
(width height)  
ADF; single sheet:  
Maximum 8.5 inches 35.4 inches,  
Minimum  
Letter, Legal, Half-letter,A4, A5, A6, F4, Executive, DL,  
CM10, Monarch, Postcard (3.9 5.8 inches)  
4.7 inches 3.9 inches  
Paper cassette; 500 sheets (60 90 g/m2, 20 24 lb)  
Bypass tray; 50 sheets (60 90 g/m2, 20 24 lb)  
ADF; two or more sheets:  
Maximum 8.5 inches 14.0 inches,  
Minimum  
Receiving paper tray capacity: 300 sheets (60 90 g/m2, 20 24 lb)  
Miscellaneous  
5.8 inches 4.1 inches  
FBS  
Maximum 8.5 inches 14.0 inches  
50 sheets  
W eight:  
Approx. 51.4 lb (23.3 Kg)  
ADF capacity:  
Dimensions :  
W idth 20.1 Depth 19.4 Height 14.8 (inches)  
Approx. 20,000 pages******  
Document thickness:  
30.2 104.7 g/m2, 13-24 lb (Single sheet)  
Drum cartridge life:  
Toner cartridge life:  
Starter toner cartridge life:  
52.3 80 g/m2, 13-20 lb (Two or more sheets)  
Approx. 16,000 pages******  
Grayscale:  
256-level  
Approx. ,3,000 pages******  
Printout  
Printer resolution:  
First copy time:  
*Using the ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax machine with normal resolution.  
600 dpi  
** Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax machine. Your trans-  
mission times will vary, but your fax machine always will provide the fastest transmission  
speeds possible under ITU-T guidelines and phone-line conditions.  
MFX-1300: Approx. 12 seconds (using Letter-sized  
paper in 1st paper cassette)  
MFX-1700: Approx. 10 seconds (using Letter-sized  
paper in 1st paper cassette)  
*** In the case that the remote fax has the ability of 406 dpi× 392 lpi .  
If not, the superfine resolution is 203 dpi× 392 lpi , and the grayscale resolution in real  
time transmission is 203 dpi× 196 lpi .  
Paper exit system:  
Printing method:  
Face up exit system  
LED scanning, Electrophotographic dry powered  
image transfer to plain paper  
**** When using the postcard, the printing speed will be slower.  
***** The A4, A5, F4, A6, Executive, DL, CM10, Monarch and Postcard can be used only for  
coping.  
Print speed:  
MFX-1300: Up to 13 ppm (using Letter-sized paper in  
1stpaper cassette)  
MFX-1700: Up to 17 ppm**** (using Letter-sized paper  
in 1st paper cassette)  
****** Based on 6% document coverage and letter-sized two-page interval printing.  
Receive reduction print:  
Copy reduce and enlarge:  
Smoothing print:  
Auto (Variable from 100% to 50% by 1% ratio)  
Fixed (100%, 97%, 91%, 81% or 75%)  
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Variable from 50% to 200% by 1% ratio  
Fixed (200%, 129%, 100%, 78%, 64% or 50%)  
Yes  
AI.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Regulatory information  
If problems arise  
United States of America  
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remote it from your telephone line, as it  
may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily stop service.  
When practical, they will notify you before this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be notified as soon as  
possible. When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and will be informed of your right to  
file a complaint with the FCC.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)information  
Ringer Equivalence Number (RENs): MFX-1300: ACREN,0.4B;DCREN,0.3. MFX-1700: ACREN,2.1B;DCREN,0.3.  
This facsimile machine has been tested and found to comply with the limitsfor a Class  
A
digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCCrules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a  
residential installation.  
In the event repairs are ever needed on your fax machine, they should be done by Muratec America, Inc., or an  
authorized representative of Muratec America, Inc. For information, contact the Muratec Customer Support Center at 800-  
347-3296 (from the U. S. only).  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will  
not occur in a particularinstallation.  
Canada  
If this equipment causes interference in radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Industry Canada (IC) regulations  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TVtechnician for help.  
IC RINGEREQUIVALENCENUMBER(REN): MFX-1300: 0.3, MFX-1700: 0.7.  
The ICRENfor your equipment is 0.3 (MFX-1300),0.7(MFX-1700).The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each termi-  
nal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The  
termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs  
of all the devices does not exceed 5.  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCCrules. On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains, among other  
information, the FCCregistration number and RENfor this equipment. If so requested, you must provide this information to the  
telephone company.  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class  
ference-causing equipment standard entitled DigitalApparatus, ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.  
A
limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the inter-  
An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug are provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be con-  
nected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part-68-compliant.  
Cet appareil numØrique respecte les limites de bruits radioØlectriques applicables aux appareils numØriques de  
Classe  
des Communications.  
Notice: This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is con-  
A
prescrites dans la norme sur le matØriel brouilleur: Appareils NumØriques, NMB-003 ØdictØe parleMinistre  
Telephone company procedures  
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally have  
to make changes in its equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the operation of  
your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes necessary to main-  
tain uninterrupted service.  
firmed by the registration number.The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration  
was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating the Industry Canada technical specifications were  
met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approval the equipment.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local  
telecommunications company.The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. Sometimes,  
the company sinside wiring associated with a single-line individual service may be extended with a certified connector  
assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with these conditions may not prevent  
degradation of service in some situations.  
If you have any questions about your telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the tele-  
phone companywillprovidethisinformation upon request.  
Incertain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you about the equip-  
ment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCCregistration  
number and the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment which is connected to your line. Both of these numbers  
are listed on the equipment label attached to your fax machine.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the  
supplier.Any equipment malfunction, or repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, may give the telecommuni-  
cations company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
The sum of all RENSon your telephone line should be fewer than five (5) in order to assure proper service from the telephone  
company. Sometimes, a sum of five (5) may not be usable on a given telephone line.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and  
internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.  
Note:  
This equipment is hearing-aid-compatible(HAC).  
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric  
inspection authority or electrician.  
Notice:  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other  
electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains, either in  
a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted pageoronthe first page of the transmission, the date and time it  
was sent and an identification of the business or other identity, or other individual sending the message and the  
telephone number of the sending machine or such business, entity or individual. For instructions on programming  
this information (the TTI ) into your fax machine, see pages 1.18 1.19.  
Type of service  
Your fax is designed for use on standard-device telephone lines. The fax connectstothe telephone line with a standard line  
called the USOCRJ-11. Connection to telephone-company-provided coin service (central-office-implemented systems).  
Connection to party line service is subject to Statetariffs.  
AI.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Limited warranty  
T
his warranty is made by Muratec America, Inc. (hereafter referred to as Muratec ). This warranty is valid only  
EXCEPTASEXPRESSLY SETFORTHABOVE,ANDEXCEPTTO THEEXTENTPROHIBITEDBYAPPLICABLELAW,MURATECMAKESNO  
OTHERWARRANTIES,EXPRESSORIMPLIED (INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO,ANYIMPLIED WARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITY  
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,AND ANY WARRANTY ARISING FROM COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE),  
AND MURATEC EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMSALLWARRANTIES NOTSTATED HEREIN.INTHE EVENTTHE PRODUCTIS NOTFREE FROM  
DEFECTSAS WARRANTEDABOVE,THE CUSTOMERS SOLE REMEDYSHALLBE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENTAS PROVIDEDABOVE.  
UNDERNOCIRCUMSTANCESSHALLMURATECBELIABLE TO THE CUSTOMER,ORTO ANYUSER,FORANYDAMAGES,INCLUDING  
ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES,EXPENSES,LOST PROFITS,LOST SAVINGS ORANY OTHER DAMAGESARISING  
OUT OF THE USE O R INABILITY TO USE THE MURATEC PRODUCT,EVEN IF MURATEC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN  
ADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES.  
Some States do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, and some States  
do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusions may not  
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from  
State to State.  
on Muratec products purchased and used in the United States of America. This warranty applies to the product  
only while owned and used by the original purchaser ( Customer ). If ownership of the product is transferred,  
this warranty terminates. This warranty does not apply to any product in use for rental purposes.  
This Muratec product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for ninety (90) days commenc-  
ing the date of original Customer purchase. If the product is defective in material and/or workmanship (normal  
wear and tear excepted) during the warranty period, Muratec or its authorized representative will, during  
Muratec s established service availability hours, make necessary adjustments and repairs, including, at  
Muratec soption, installation of replacement parts. Muratec s service availability hours are 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM  
(Central time) Monday through Friday, excluding Muratec-recognized holidays. Muratec will complete the nec-  
essary adjustments and repairs within a reasonable time period, as dictated by the nature of the problem and  
by Muratec s service schedule. Replacement parts may have been used and/or reconditioned. Parts that have  
been replaced will remain the property of Muratec. This warranty is subject to the OBLIGATIONS and EXCLUSIONS  
set forth.  
Obligations  
1. This warranty will be honored only on presentation of the original dated authorized Muratec bill of sale or  
Muratec dealer bill of sale or sales slip to an authorized Muratec service representative or service center.  
For the name of your authorized service center, contact Muratec (from the United States, call  
1-972-364-3350; from Canada, check your in-box materials for the number to call).  
2. During the warranty period, the Customer must notify Muratec by telephone of any defective product mater-  
ial and/or workmanship.  
3. Transportation (including prepayment of freight and insurance charges) of the product to and from an autho-  
rized service center, designated by Muratec, is the responsibility of the Customer.  
4. If Muratec provides maintenance or responds to a call which is outside the scope of this warranty, such  
maintenance shall be billed to the Customer at Muratec s then-current rates for maintenance and parts and  
shall be due and payable in full upon receipt of invoice.  
Exclusions  
1. This warranty shall not cover a product with missing or altered original identification marks.  
2. This warranty applies only to products that the purchaser has properly installed, adjusted and operated in  
accordance with the instructions set forth in or provided with product literature. This warranty does not apply  
to any product which has been subjected to tampering, alteration, misuse, abuse, neglect, improper installa-  
tion or transportation damage. Nor does it apply to costs for any service requested for demonstration or to  
confirm proper operation of this product.  
3. The warranty shall not apply to adjustments,repairs or replacements necessitated by any cause beyond the  
control of Muratec (whether foreseeable or not) including, but not limited to, any malfunction, defectsorfail-  
ure caused by or resulting from any of the following: improper unpacking or installation, unauthorized  
service or parts, or improper maintenance or cleaning, modification or repair by the Customer, accident  
(including, without limitation, unavoidable accidents), fire, flood or other Acts of God, improper telephone or  
electrical power or surges thereof, interconnection with or use of non-compatible equipment or supplies  
(including paper), or placement of the product in an area which does not conform to Muratec space, electri-  
cal and/or environmental requirements.  
4. Muratec will not be required to make adjustments,repairs or replacementsifthe product is installed or used  
at a location deemed by Muratec to be hazardous to health or safety, or if Muratec is not provided with free  
and reasonable access to the product and a telephone during service availability hours, or if the product  
location is not accessible by an authorized Muratec service vehicle.  
AI.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Index  
Print margin .......................................................... 4.6  
Setting combine ....................................................... 4.8  
Setting copy auto ...................................................... 4.7  
Setting Negative/Positive ................................................ 4.7  
for dialing ................................................................ 4.5  
Pause length ......................................................... 4.5  
Redial settings ........................................................ 4.5  
for operation ............................................................. 4.9  
2-bin tray ........................................................... 4.10  
Primary standby mode ................................................. 4.10  
Setting Sleep mode ................................................... 4.10  
Setting the silent mode .................................................. 4.9  
for reception ............................................................. 4.3  
Half-page reception .................................................... 4.3  
Image Rotation ........................................................ 4.4  
Number of rings ....................................................... 4.4  
Print reduction rate ..................................................... 4.3  
Reduction margin ...................................................... 4.3  
for transmission ........................................................... 4.1  
ECM Mode ........................................................... 4.1  
Memory transmission ................................................... 4.2  
Primary contrast mode .................................................. 4.1  
Primary resolution mode ................................................ 4.1  
Quick Memory transmission .............................................. 4.2  
TTI Transmit .......................................................... 4.2  
Print your settings ........................................................ 4.11  
Copy Settings ........................................................ 4.11  
Fax Settings ......................................................... 4.11  
Machine Settings ..................................................... 4.11  
Combine .................................................................... 1.3  
Comm. Cancel/Confirm. ........................................................ 1.3  
Comm. light ................................................................. 1.3  
Control Panel ................................................................ 1.3  
Copies .................................................................... 2.12  
Basic procedure ......................................................... 2.12  
Document type .......................................................... 2.16  
Enlarge ................................................................ 2.13  
Image contrast .......................................................... 2.16  
Multiple copies ........................................................... 2.13  
Protection .............................................................. 2.18  
Reduce ................................................................ 2.13  
Reversing black and white areas ............................................ 2.17  
Single copy ............................................................. 2.12  
A
AC power cord ............................................................... 1.1  
AC power switch ............................................................. 1.7  
Activity journal .............................................................. 3.20  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) .............................................. 2.1  
Advanced functions ........................................................... 1.3  
Alarm light .................................................................. 1.3  
Autodialer ................................................................... 3.1  
Call group ............................................................... 3.7  
Dialing characters ......................................................... 3.1  
One-touch dialing ......................................................... 3.2  
Speed-dial ............................................................... 3.4  
B
Batch transmission ........................................................... 3.11  
Creating or modifying ..................................................... 3.11  
Erasing a document ...................................................... 3.13  
Erasing an empty batch box ................................................ 3.13  
Printing a document stored in a batch box ..................................... 3.12  
Printing a list of batch boxes ................................................ 3.12  
Printing a list of stored batch documents ...................................... 3.12  
Storing a document ....................................................... 3.12  
Block JunkFax .............................................................. 3.53  
Broadcast ................................................................... 1.3  
Broadcasting ............................................................. 2.8,3.9  
Reviewing or canceling parts of a broadcast .................................... 2.8  
Bypass key .................................................................. 1.3  
C
Call group dialing ............................................................. 3.7  
Call request ................................................................ 3.24  
Canceling commands ......................................................... 2.7  
Printing a delayed command list .............................................. 2.8  
Printing a stored document .................................................. 2.8  
Review Commands ........................................................ 2.7  
Caring for your fax machine .................................................... 5.12  
Corrective cleaning ....................................................... 5.12  
Changing the default settings  
for copying ............................................................... 4.6  
Copy auto reset time ................................................... 4.7  
Primary contrast ....................................................... 4.6  
Primary document type ................................................. 4.6  
AI.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Using the bypass tray ..................................................... 2.14  
Quick Memory transmission ................................................. 4.2  
Reception modes ........................................................ 2.10  
Redial .................................................................. 4.5  
Reduction margin ......................................................... 4.3  
Resolution ............................................................... 4.1  
Rx reduction rate .......................................................... 4.3  
Security reception ........................................................ 3.49  
TTI transmission .......................................................... 4.2  
Faxes ...................................................................... 2.1  
Receiving ............................................................... 2.10  
Answering calls manually ............................................... 2.10  
Reception modes ..................................................... 2.10  
Sending ................................................................. 2.1  
Canceling commands ................................................... 2.7  
Contrast ............................................................. 2.2  
Dialing pause ......................................................... 2.2  
from Memory ......................................................... 2.3  
How to set the document ................................................ 2.1  
In real time ........................................................... 2.3  
Resolution, grayscale ................................................... 2.2  
using MONITOR/CALLkey or a handset ....................................... 2.6  
using the ADF ......................................................... 2.4  
using the FBS glass .................................................... 2.5  
F-Code boxes ............................................................... 3.25  
Bulletin box ......................................................... 3.25,3.29  
Auto Print ........................................................... 3.27  
Erase Tx Doc ........................................................ 3.28  
Overwrite Doc ........................................................ 3.27  
Rx Protect ........................................................... 3.27  
Creating or modifying ..................................................... 3.25  
Erasing an empty F-Code box .............................................. 3.32  
F-Code polling ........................................................... 3.34  
F-Code transmission ...................................................... 3.33  
Printing a list of documents stored in your F-Code boxes ......................... 3.29  
Printing a list of F-Code boxes .............................................. 3.29  
Relay box .......................................................... 3.26,3.32  
Auto Print ........................................................... 3.28  
Select TTI ........................................................... 3.28  
Security box ........................................................ 3.25,3.31  
Document hold time setting ............................................. 3.28  
Function table ............................................................... 1.14  
Copy Count key .............................................................. 1.3  
Copy light ................................................................... 1.3  
Copy setting list ......................................................... 2.18,4.11  
Auto reset time ........................................................... 4.7  
Combine ............................................................ 2.17,4.8  
Contrast ................................................................. 4.6  
Copy auto ............................................................... 4.7  
Copy Protect ............................................................ 2.18  
Document type ........................................................... 4.6  
Margin .................................................................. 4.6  
Negative/Positive .....................................................2.17, 4.7  
Sort copy ................................................................ 4.7  
Cover page ................................................................. 3.22  
D
Delayed transmission ......................................................... 3.10  
Department code ............................................................ 3.55  
Dialing Characters ............................................................ 3.1  
Document tray ............................................................... 1.1  
DRD (distinctive ring detection) ................................................. 3.23  
Drum cartridge ........................................................... 1.1,1.6  
E
EasyDial directory dialing ....................................................... 3.8  
Energy saving mode ......................................................... 4.10  
Error messages .............................................................. 5.5  
Errors ...................................................................... 5.9  
Extension paper tray .......................................................... 1.1  
F
Fax & Copy ................................................................ 3.20  
Fax light .................................................................... 1.3  
Fax setting list ................................................. 1.19,2.10,3.53,4.11  
Block Junk Fax .......................................................... 3.53  
Contrast ................................................................. 4.1  
Cover Page ............................................................. 3.22  
Department code ......................................................... 3.55  
Department code protection ................................................ 3.56  
DRD................................................................... 3.23  
ECM ................................................................... 4.1  
Half-page reception ........................................................ 4.3  
Journal auto print ........................................................ 3.21  
Journal Line Up .......................................................... 3.21  
Memory transmission ...................................................... 4.2  
Number of rings ........................................................... 4.4  
Passcode............................................................... 3.15  
Phone Type ............................................................. 1.19  
PIN mask feature ........................................................ 3.51  
G
Group ...................................................................... 1.3  
I
Initialsettings ............................................................... 1.18  
AI.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Paper size stickers ............................................................ 1.1  
Pause character,entering ...................................................... 2.2  
PIN masking ................................................................ 3.51  
Passcode............................................................... 3.49  
Polling ..................................................................... 3.14  
Being polled ............................................................. 3.14  
Limiting polling access .................................................... 3.15  
Regular polling .......................................................... 3.14  
Print quality problems .......................................................... 5.3  
Printer status lights ............................................................ 1.4  
Printing your settings ......................................................... 4.11  
Copy settings list ......................................................... 4.11  
Fax settings list .......................................................... 4.11  
Machine settings list ...................................................... 4.11  
Program list ................................................................ 4.11  
Programmable one-touch keys ................................................. 3.35  
J
Jammed paper, removing ...................................................... 5.1  
L
Location ID .................................................................. 3.1  
M
Machine setting list ...................................................... 1.18,4.11  
2-bin .................................................................. 4.10  
Language .............................................................. 1.18  
Paper size of the 1st cassette ................................................ 1.9  
Paper size of the 2nd Cassette ............................................... 1.9  
Paper size of the Bypass Tray .............................................. 1.10  
Paper source ............................................................ 4.10  
Primary mode ........................................................... 4.10  
Service Mode ........................................................... 1.14  
Silent mode .............................................................. 4.9  
Alarm & Key Volume ................................................... 4.9  
Alarm Silent .......................................................... 4.9  
Key Buzzer Silent ...................................................... 4.9  
Ringer Silent .......................................................... 4.9  
Sleep mode ............................................................. 4.10  
Soft Keys ............................................................... 3.16  
Macro Keys ................................................................. 1.4  
Macros .................................................................... 3.17  
Erasing ................................................................ 3.19  
Printing a list of your Macro keys ............................................ 3.19  
Programming ............................................................ 3.17  
Memory receive light .......................................................... 1.3  
Memory transmission .......................................................... 2.3  
Mirror carriage locking plate ..................................................... 1.5  
Q
QuadAccess ................................................................ 3.25  
Quick memory transmission ..................................................... 2.3  
R
Real time transmission ......................................................... 2.3  
Receiving faxes ............................................................. 2.10  
Redialing ................................................................... 2.6  
Regulatory information ........................................................AI.3  
Reports, confirmation ......................................................... 3.21  
S
Security features ............................................................ 3.49  
Block Junk Fax .......................................................... 3.53  
Department codes ........................................................ 3.55  
Masking the PIN ......................................................... 3.51  
Passcode............................................................... 3.49  
Security reception ........................................................ 3.49  
Security reception 3.49  
O
One-touch keys .............................................................. 3.2  
Entering or changing ....................................................... 3.2  
Erasing ................................................................. 3.3  
One-touch fax dialing ...................................................... 3.3  
One-touch phone dialing .................................................... 3.4  
Printing a list of one-touch numbers ........................................... 3.3  
One-touch labels ............................................................. 1.1  
Operating tips ............................................................... 1.11  
Out-of-paper reception ........................................................ 2.11  
Passcode............................................................... 3.49  
Sending faxes ............................................................... 2.1  
Setting up ................................................................... 1.5  
Adjust the monitor speaker s volume .......................................... 1.8  
Attach the paper-handling parts .............................................. 1.7  
Initialsettings ............................................................ 1.18  
Installing the printing supplies ................................................ 1.6  
Pick an installation spot ..................................................... 1.5  
Turning off the transport mode ............................................... 1.8  
Unlocking the mirror carriage ................................................1.5  
Soft Key labels ............................................................... 1.1  
Soft Keys ............................................................... 1.3,3.16  
Setting .................................................................3.16  
P
Page counter ............................................................... 3.24  
Paper ...................................................................... 1.8  
Acceptable paper size ...................................................... 1.8  
Paper size setting ......................................................... 1.9  
AI.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Sort ........................................................................ 1.3  
Sorting copies .............................................................. 2.13  
Special features ............................................................. 3.16  
Activity journal ........................................................... 3.20  
Call request ............................................................. 3.24  
Cover page ............................................................. 3.22  
Distinctive ring detection (DRD) ............................................. 3.23  
Fax & Copy ............................................................. 3.20  
F-Code Boxes ........................................................... 3.25  
Macro keys ............................................................. 3.17  
Programmable one-touch keys .............................................. 3.35  
Reports ................................................................ 3.21  
Soft keys ............................................................... 3.16  
Specifications ............................................................AI.1-AI.2  
Speed-dial numbers ........................................................... 3.4  
Entering or changing ....................................................... 3.4  
Erasing .................................................................3.5  
Fax dialing via speed-dial ................................................... 3.6  
Phoning via speed-dial ..................................................... 3.6  
Printing a list of speed-dial numbers ........................................... 3.5  
Subscriber ID (your fax’s phone number) ......................................... 1.19  
T
Telephone line cord ........................................................... 1.1  
Toner cartridge ........................................................... 1.1,1.6  
Troubleshooting .............................................................. 5.5  
TTI (Transmit Terminal Identifier) ................................................ 1.18  
U
Using the optional handset .................................................... 2.19  
V
View the result of fax transaction ................................................. 2.9  
W
W arranty,limited .............................................................AI.4  
AI.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Muratec America, Inc.  
6400 International Parkway  
Suite 1500  
Plano, Texas 75093  
http://www.muratec.com  
MAI order number:  
MMLitem number:  
' Muratec America, Inc. 2002  
Printed in China.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Murphy Automobile Parts A88 User Manual
NETGEAR Switch GS700TS User Manual
Nortel Networks Telephone A0789401 User Manual
Omron Blood Pressure Monitor RX 3 User Manual
Onkyo Speaker System Ls 3100 User Manual
OWI Portable Speaker P8378P User Manual
Panasonic Air Conditioner CS 1873KR User Manual
Panasonic Camcorder AG AC130A User Manual
Panasonic DVD Player DVD S38 User Manual
Panasonic Fax Machine KX PW505DL User Manual